CatalogIt Help Wiki mediawiki https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Help MediaWiki 1.34.4 first-letter Media Special Talk User User talk CatalogIt Help Wiki CatalogIt Help Wiki talk File File talk MediaWiki MediaWiki talk Template Template talk Help Help talk Category Category talk 0 1 1 2019-09-04T00:24:58Z MediaWiki default 0 wikitext text/x-wiki <strong>MediaWiki has been installed.</strong> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 5702e4d5fd9173246331a889294caf01a3ad3706 3 1 2019-09-04T00:36:49Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt Help and Documentation == <strong>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Getting started == * CatalogIt Basics * Importing Data * Blah, blah, blah <br /> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] c718d9818c4d7e2edbd6ff0e85aac3e4661fc60a 4 3 2019-09-04T00:37:30Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt Help and Documentation == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Getting started == * CatalogIt Basics * Importing Data * Blah, blah, blah <br> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 3018fe5a8c861a1cf27c4e539f3fcc6abf71e27b 5 4 2019-09-04T00:38:52Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * CatalogIt Basics * Importing Data * Blah, blah, blah <br> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 4137ebdd0b9c11cd512cd7547373aab70856d2a4 6 5 2019-09-04T01:17:59Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] <br> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 1cfbcc1290b48a8d90aad0159c04fd89f22b8c24 12 6 2019-09-04T01:23:50Z Howard 1 /* Help and Documentation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data into CatalogIt]] <br> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 77e01f8b080e288a669ac3f98b3f9367bd4dc73c 13 12 2019-09-04T01:24:04Z Howard 1 /* Help and Documentation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] <br> Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 1cfbcc1290b48a8d90aad0159c04fd89f22b8c24 14 13 2019-09-04T02:18:50Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] == Legacy Content providing Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 122fc1bfe1ffbadaecb9a2ae55008523d0e27b19 15 14 2019-09-04T02:19:19Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt == <strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 4a346387ebab224deb7bf68618e8a60be7093566 16 15 2019-09-04T02:22:08Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki <div style="font-size:24px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 2852922984d3f7f7125be429dcc778c2cf6e716f 17 16 2019-09-04T02:23:56Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 743546f1744ebd2e73fa7aae56484a1c46e61eba 18 17 2019-09-04T02:24:16Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 09c2c6d471524c769efae118f05cbbb49fa21a4a 31 18 2019-09-04T15:48:22Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[How-To Videos]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] b8a0c63187b227097185d0a221801e5a6c3b7c12 38 31 2019-09-04T16:49:34Z Howard 1 /* Getting started */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[How-To Videos]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images:Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 9399096ba6feeced02fac52ba04e26d1f2f5392c 39 38 2019-09-04T16:50:21Z Howard 1 /* Getting started */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == * [[CatalogIt Basics]] * [[How-To Videos]] * [[Importing Data]] == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] eaa6498fd00316b1fd229ec65d60040dac3b2a0f 46 39 2019-09-04T17:15:09Z Howard 1 /* Help and Documentation */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === === [[How-To Videos]] === === [[Importing Data]] === == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 7f66c32a968671133e3607e36efc8e9c25a1b262 47 46 2019-09-04T17:15:49Z Howard 1 /* CatalogIt Basics */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt === [[How-To Videos]] === === [[Importing Data]] === == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 6281247a51005410cc5ee5056795e8e9d7f7d81a 48 47 2019-09-04T17:17:24Z Howard 1 /* Help and Documentation */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequent Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 9c74d60a3c40d8b034975d01aa976489aee27559 49 48 2019-09-04T17:27:00Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents, yet has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequent Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 762b41ac72e3578553b93e06fbddfc695241d1a2 51 49 2019-09-04T18:01:26Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents, yet has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals. CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequent Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] e8958092d5b5f72192c11eaa367ba0665037f396 52 51 2019-09-04T18:02:45Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequent Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] b41b8003d72b77256134a1fc838031647e59e7cc 8 2 2 2019-09-04T00:35:32Z Howard 1 Created page with "/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic..." css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } 280126144e5d9235b0375cf775b763e020dfc116 0 3 7 2019-09-04T01:18:42Z Howard 1 Created page with "== CatalogIt Basics == * Logging In * Changing Password" wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt Basics == * Logging In * Changing Password a51b5c4da96a3a28193753a87c32fa0b5f563df7 8 7 2019-09-04T01:18:57Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki * Logging In * Changing Password 20852a36be32531db9a6a62da623bde6c0ee7197 53 8 2019-09-04T19:36:24Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == WHAT IS CATALOGIT? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == LOGGING IN TO CATALOGIT == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (we recommend using Chrome, Safari or Firefox) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == BASIC NAVIGATION == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == CREATING AN ENTRY == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 434054b2116746220086e3c03a6121ab5cb19da2 0 4 9 2019-09-04T01:20:12Z Howard 1 Created page with "== CatalogIt Import Process User Guide === This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capa..." wikitext text/x-wiki == CatalogIt Import Process User Guide === This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). e69f730e5ea80dd6f9ece014a6e456fa912e7d2b 10 9 2019-09-04T01:22:49Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. === Classifications === CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. === Import into new Folder === To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” === New Records Only; No Updates === When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). === Importing Entries and Profiles === You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. === Select Leaf Properties Only === When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. 743c32fc28f6322c538c894e2ad5fc35afb07b9a 11 10 2019-09-04T01:23:22Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. 39da721953b148a83dd3f482c60a494c0be798d2 20 11 2019-09-04T03:01:18Z Howard 1 /* Select Leaf Properties Only */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. <gallery> Select_Leaf_Properties.png|Select Leaf Nodes Only </gallery> 7a8f9d5ae46207b057c245df326717cb4efb869c 21 20 2019-09-04T03:04:16Z Howard 1 /* Select Leaf Properties Only */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. <gallery> Select_Leaf_Properties.png|300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only </gallery> 521259f406070c522bb114b56a02cf24e91942ec 22 21 2019-09-04T03:06:15Z Howard 1 /* Select Leaf Properties Only */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] 153eed0013634d8f64b542ddfd450553251cea84 23 22 2019-09-04T03:08:08Z Howard 1 /* Select Leaf Properties Only */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. cfe03ce92043c6c6c59d350a68b17fcb3614a438 25 23 2019-09-04T03:12:17Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] 9456641a23bbc05b2605a74ae16e8835efa00fa4 26 25 2019-09-04T03:13:04Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. 4db9a3bca63c9e4bc08e02c8987325307fab4dcb 28 26 2019-09-04T03:16:07Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. fa4098087bb128624fd50148df56070e25657d6d 35 28 2019-09-04T15:58:12Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. -->>> INSERT IMAGE HERE <<<-- In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Config.png|thumb]] 793af4befc258c932df056c6aaa9ab2a4cf397c7 36 35 2019-09-04T15:58:57Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. -->>> INSERT IMAGE HERE <<<-- In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Config.png|frameless,300px|Save Import Configuration]] f8c367381900da39f94b9792dd117fb7bd87bcc0 6 5 19 2019-09-04T03:00:14Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 6 24 2019-09-04T03:11:17Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 8 30 2019-09-04T14:36:23Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 0 9 32 2019-09-04T15:50:51Z Howard 1 Created page with "== Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=right }}" wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=right }} 482a01a48673406fa3d8d47d3150997bcae95756 33 32 2019-09-04T15:52:02Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=right }} <youtube>https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ</youtube> 41d1e813c5200388cf87050d624b2514519424dd 37 33 2019-09-04T16:47:56Z Howard 1 /* Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} 5b07521b622bc4e5ce0190d8cea2f3c6c5789477 40 37 2019-09-04T16:56:07Z Howard 1 /* Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 3d3335b52088f43de56be0ff99c812ec9e336a4a 41 40 2019-09-04T16:56:34Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 495b4d764ad8470157ea1924386d3dd0e0bc0526 42 41 2019-09-04T16:57:10Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == <div> {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} </div> This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. c9157537248fa45990a0c50c4ed3c77d7093ee5c 43 42 2019-09-04T16:57:45Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ |alignment=left }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 73247b20de781c11ebe3a83e20066345a0adb2ad 44 43 2019-09-04T17:01:47Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Creating and Entry with you Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GVh4B8KYf2o&t=5s }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. b2b06be808586e500fd19a4096e6c580de871bbb 45 44 2019-09-04T17:02:11Z Howard 1 /* Creating and Entry with you Smartphone */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GVh4B8KYf2o&t=5s }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 83b88e9dbf1b53c6ee291e17c5548b02c975b705 8 11 50 2019-09-04T17:33:49Z Howard 1 Created page with "* category name @ breadcrumb wikitext @ tab name @ site logo" wikitext text/x-wiki * category name @ breadcrumb wikitext @ tab name @ site logo 390a57d4d32da54bc175808a401fef6b881e9247 0 3 54 53 2019-09-04T19:37:38Z Howard 1 /* LOGGING IN TO CATALOGIT */ wikitext text/x-wiki == WHAT IS CATALOGIT? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == LOGGING IN TO CATALOGIT == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == BASIC NAVIGATION == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == CREATING AN ENTRY == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 99350f32f7ca5fad67af1b2e35659f80f66694db 55 54 2019-09-04T19:37:54Z Howard 1 /* WHAT IS CATALOGIT? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == LOGGING IN TO CATALOGIT == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == BASIC NAVIGATION == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == CREATING AN ENTRY == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 34348197d4aee74b181a940614777bdf2666634d 56 55 2019-09-04T19:38:17Z Howard 1 /* LOGGING IN TO CATALOGIT */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == BASIC NAVIGATION == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == CREATING AN ENTRY == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 316274fdb0a50f183d38acc01fbd3488bc83c133 57 56 2019-09-04T19:38:32Z Howard 1 /* BASIC NAVIGATION */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == CREATING AN ENTRY == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 8eff2719a2413d02427b72e8c3b7f1d2556eb744 58 57 2019-09-04T19:38:46Z Howard 1 /* CREATING AN ENTRY */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == VIEWING ENTRIES == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app eba80ab194344e54e922a49d9315fbc53ce5e458 59 58 2019-09-04T19:38:58Z Howard 1 /* VIEWING ENTRIES */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == EDITING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app e3dc5f37c49ea506a550d0c83850c163ac005a06 60 59 2019-09-04T19:39:09Z Howard 1 /* EDITING AN ENTRY */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 29a44ed0eb3908bfaf4d28c5ef933843746a8b89 61 60 2019-09-04T19:39:26Z Howard 1 /* MANAGING PHOTOS AND PDFS */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == DELETING AN ENTRY == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 37de42a5eab1a37a52eab62f33228cf9d65d8846 62 61 2019-09-04T19:39:45Z Howard 1 /* DELETING AN ENTRY */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == CREATING A NEW FOLDER == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 97571b34ac6d28c8ad2b30d76b9f0611c7e83d71 63 62 2019-09-04T19:40:04Z Howard 1 /* CREATING A NEW FOLDER */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 0be084d34bedcc740beb573e81dc4576776ef581 64 63 2019-09-04T19:40:26Z Howard 1 /* EMAIL, PASSWORD, AND OTHER SETTINGS */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == GETTING HELP == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 26ebfd53b35ac59834a4c4097cf40071f3260145 65 64 2019-09-04T19:40:36Z Howard 1 /* GETTING HELP */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == CatalogIt Home Screen.png Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app c2a4c0ee04d5dce1667a2fc382d2667e45b3b078 96 65 2019-09-06T03:23:27Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == PRIMARY-IMAGE Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app cfa6cae08c85e8edd1a12065d0ddeae6ecfc434c 98 96 2019-09-06T19:02:42Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. [[File:Primary-orientation.png|thumb]] == Basic Navigation == PRIMARY-IMAGE Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app a24844bbc93568a38b9242994d80f98f049f2a59 99 98 2019-09-06T19:04:12Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless,300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 8bab9d850a83d2039039883aa46438e21cac302f 100 99 2019-09-06T19:05:49Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. Menu.png The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app ca5ddee917482fb598e0a7fb5825d149c9b7af25 102 100 2019-09-06T19:09:58Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. * [[File:Menu.png|frameless|20px]] The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. Action.png The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. Search.png The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. Create.png The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. Leaderboard.png The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 9177f781f293f5f34df7aefbfb6b236a7ffd88e0 0 1 66 52 2019-09-04T19:41:12Z Howard 1 /* Tips and Frequent Asked Questions */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is an application for documenting the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequently Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] ca2200c5f1bce27d5d1d0952db78a49d66095170 86 66 2019-09-05T20:12:57Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Tips and Frequently Asked Questions ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 7ab5cb3f4ad630e2b61b31dd8270c17e1e6ab9a5 6 12 67 2019-09-04T23:17:16Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Open Saved Configuration 4605d339a09ecfd7f384bf69db0caae05840f22b 87 67 2019-09-06T03:02:02Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki Open Saved Configuration 4605d339a09ecfd7f384bf69db0caae05840f22b 88 87 2019-09-06T03:07:13Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Saved Import Configuration 9b6c2d36666f0385ecf6976c9a8c0046e7040249 89 88 2019-09-06T03:08:17Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki Saved Import Configuration 9b6c2d36666f0385ecf6976c9a8c0046e7040249 0 4 68 36 2019-09-04T23:17:38Z Howard 1 /* Save Mapping Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Config.png|frameless,300px|Save Import Configuration]] 13278fd25f612883b04d0fe0d61b9b62f23d7a3a 70 68 2019-09-04T23:19:32Z Howard 1 /* Save Mapping Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Save Import Configuration]] 3d232312d8bb86ee14765ea84eabced2f132916c 75 70 2019-09-05T01:16:34Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Save Import Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. \=== Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). INSERT IMAGE From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 618227793efe5d0501fdb71285e1a3949eb1c768 76 75 2019-09-05T01:17:11Z Howard 1 /* Save Mapping Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Save Import Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Save Import Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. \=== Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). INSERT IMAGE From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 18abc12c55396ce6a589b5680ebdb0fb28c16f59 91 76 2019-09-06T03:13:32Z Howard 1 /* Reusing Mapping Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). INSERT IMAGE From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 161045d97728d5d07ecfbb3423a1c018e67fdddb 93 91 2019-09-06T03:15:00Z Howard 1 /* Save Mapping Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). INSERT IMAGE From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. d9d437a847d2f983e7cdf32e57926d5d73373784 94 93 2019-09-06T03:16:57Z Howard 1 /* Using Saved Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). [[File:Open Saved Configuration|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. ff31d89d063dca7d619d4c7c5ffd947b80477643 95 94 2019-09-06T03:17:58Z Howard 1 /* Using Saved Configurations */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below). == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 2b9903f76c197552113ad49db77a9695d67d72df 6 5 71 19 2019-09-05T01:09:50Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Select Leaf Properties.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 6 72 24 2019-09-05T01:11:33Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Edit Labels.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 8 73 30 2019-09-05T01:13:06Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Audit Properties.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 14 74 2019-09-05T01:15:44Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Open Save Import Config 415f38f859d92846d7ef5b8c3d3c64d7119b2c9f 6 15 77 2019-09-05T19:16:22Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Profile Replace video ee90866c66b04f0b8691f0fc87c7a71f2643a789 0 16 78 2019-09-05T19:17:16Z Howard 1 Created page with "== De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|thumb]]" wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|thumb]] 6870aa47ec1432c07772bac8008844630b177cb4 79 78 2019-09-05T19:19:12Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|300px|Replacing Profiles]] 6339ef8220511877f9bf12b8e01475e33931ac98 80 79 2019-09-05T19:19:27Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] a026febb842b3bf75540796b6ad3c6b92582303f 81 80 2019-09-05T19:20:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] a189158fef7b4ac9fec97a231e9570d85240b914 82 81 2019-09-05T20:01:19Z Howard 1 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidating multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click next * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] 294d846988db895f7359d7e9dc332ff4f6edded8 83 82 2019-09-05T20:09:30Z Howard 1 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click next * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] d70bd4288eab15af7f7cd5c32c8569c64a524568 84 83 2019-09-05T20:09:44Z Howard 1 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click next * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] f82c2711f061bcfacd25e5af6a8f32d4180c65c0 85 84 2019-09-05T20:10:31Z Howard 1 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] 1eb6f78e4397549df4ff900bd124c84b4bd6b24b 6 17 90 2019-09-06T03:11:07Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 18 92 2019-09-06T03:14:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 19 97 2019-09-06T19:02:23Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Primary app orientation via thumbnail screen c2a2e2225a29ffc9179769e64df8639044ab0768 6 20 101 2019-09-06T19:08:21Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Main Menu Icon 97afe7599ded3614f48b7f630edf613fc3c971b8 6 21 103 2019-09-06T19:32:22Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Actions menu icon 76d3ec146120dde72989c4166f6619ee88593fc3 6 22 104 2019-09-06T19:33:13Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Search menu icon 3870870ce4a06536d4a03c71e2db3d819c6fd702 6 23 105 2019-09-06T19:33:59Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Create floating action icon a9fbddf7334d3d1412e8d35f158dcfcace03d413 6 24 106 2019-09-06T19:34:32Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Leaderboard icon a1e28877cf46e380da9944d0c170fc95563403a0 0 3 107 102 2019-09-06T19:34:50Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. * [[File:Menu.png|frameless|20px]] The Main Menu, in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. * [[File:Action.png|frameless|20px]] The Actions Menu, in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. * [[File:Search.png|frameless|20px]] The Search button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. * [[File:Create.png|frameless|20px]] The orange Create Entry button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. * [[File:Leaderboard.png|20px|frameless]] The Leaderboard, located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 39370514ef8a4ff716d924c6a8cc35223bcf9399 108 107 2019-09-06T19:47:20Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 9ae22df2aa7ec241b49aa75f0eb56abe0f59c7fe 109 108 2019-09-06T19:47:47Z Howard 1 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app bbb1851fbbb8c8d7d310b4d9b14a0feaff92619a 118 109 2019-09-07T17:51:58Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app a185f517aa0f33fd542a00c1c31b1fcaef0fecf1 130 118 2019-09-07T18:14:18Z Dan 2 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 2b3c2c72d7242ef2b314834dc0527907565235e8 131 130 2019-09-07T18:16:51Z Dan 2 /* Editing an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app e5400bec0dc54c1bbca24d44062ecb159d96e3f9 132 131 2019-09-07T18:19:32Z Dan 2 /* Managing Photos and PDFs */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. Choose the order that you want your Folder’s Entries to appear in the thumbnail screen for this new Folder from the drop down menu in the middle of of this screen. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 58f4ce3e1863e7918e88120affb2d8e8f0a89e13 133 132 2019-09-07T18:23:04Z Dan 2 /* Creating a New Folder */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 370e81ecd07b58f1be13484e5aafc80ca7e675fc 138 133 2019-09-07T20:40:00Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. Entry type.png Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app baf8673c59c0bb39ef650153fbf25a2dc35b57e6 151 138 2019-09-08T02:01:33Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 7c060fcbcbfde8ff27323d9a6186e4e32347125f 153 151 2019-09-08T02:16:06Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 211374e75b9f0842d771c5172d32e574a20a3c60 154 153 2019-09-08T02:17:42Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 53caf25752eccf902af479650b9cf55a798f72af 0 16 110 85 2019-09-07T17:14:10Z Dan 2 Dan moved page [[Tips and Frequently Asked Questions]] to [[Quick Tips]] wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] 1eb6f78e4397549df4ff900bd124c84b4bd6b24b 113 110 2019-09-07T17:17:21Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|800px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah f88618840d43732b831e870882d8aa55b5838a3f 135 113 2019-09-07T18:50:46Z Dan 2 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah d279a13ed5c65d27a993952edbbef074e127cd18 136 135 2019-09-07T18:51:26Z Dan 2 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah 16aa68f330b56f85b80bdff87bc8b2866b827b5c 139 136 2019-09-07T20:52:55Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions" To create your Tags, you'll need to follow these steps: * From the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * Select the "Tags" icon * Click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah d3140313a493042b0abd9e6312c30bcf0d923506 141 139 2019-09-07T21:02:39Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * From the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * Select the "Tags" icon * Click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. [[File:Tags profile field in Edit Entry.png|thumb]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah 18f4b844f7f151ff76a879b119c975c2f4121ff2 142 141 2019-09-07T21:06:22Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * From the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * Select the "Tags" icon * Click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry.[[File:Tags profile field in Edit Entry.png|thumb]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == blah blah blah bae0b73047975180240f19f6765751baaccbe202 143 142 2019-09-07T21:12:06Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. [[File:Tags profile field in Edit Entry.png|frameless]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner db47eed55112e96040e183ad120ecbda620f5a36 145 143 2019-09-07T21:36:56Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. [[File:Tags profile field in Edit Entry.png|frameless]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] e5f761f929f79c09dd7cbdf362a8fb75d9155f89 147 145 2019-09-07T21:41:16Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. [[File:Tags profile field in Edit Entry.png|frameless]] This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] 31ea69160ce8b9b4877d7199b7a6175858bce646 148 147 2019-09-07T21:42:49Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] e66590100ba780804b37e441e9bf4eb632c43956 0 25 111 2019-09-07T17:14:10Z Dan 2 Dan moved page [[Tips and Frequently Asked Questions]] to [[Quick Tips]] wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[Quick Tips]] 905895bf9646229362c347a474e8b8d1c3a4d9e0 0 1 112 86 2019-09-07T17:15:54Z Dan 2 /* Tips and Frequently Asked Questions */ wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Quick Tips ]] === A list of tips and frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 252b7481ce512ae2164a92b1b97a3365f180a761 114 112 2019-09-07T17:18:52Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Quick Tips ]] === A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] === A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] f0a3b04563b78ddb89394e14b7ef46de7dbfcaef 119 114 2019-09-07T17:55:08Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == Help and Documentation == === [[CatalogIt Basics]] === This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. === [[How-To Videos]] === Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. === [[ Quick Tips ]] === A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] === A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. === [[Importing Data]] === Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] bca8c378f4f053baae55bd1310b26a53613e8f1c 120 119 2019-09-07T17:56:24Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 9970e255e7bf3171d49514010acd113bc5b2b01f 121 120 2019-09-07T17:57:09Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 7010705301f587e4f33af6d5dd6cc7b0dd2ef368 125 121 2019-09-07T18:05:15Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Main Page]] to [[CatalogIt Help]] wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="font-size:24px;margin-top:8px;"><strong>CatalogIt</strong></div> <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 7010705301f587e4f33af6d5dd6cc7b0dd2ef368 128 125 2019-09-07T18:07:19Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] b0da5f18dd9a1455c640669cf920d92f9ec33b54 129 128 2019-09-07T18:07:47Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, yet is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 8187f88f8cb21125e2d848861fc7ddd6a02bb619 149 129 2019-09-08T01:47:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] 631c6b7a39b2402db9d902140a953b27f91ee2fa 0 26 115 2019-09-07T17:21:54Z Dan 2 Created page with "== How do I use Tags? == To create and delete tags == How do I change my currency settings? ==" wikitext text/x-wiki == How do I use Tags? == To create and delete tags == How do I change my currency settings? == c95321b72d4f7282c70604e97c0124c0603c3946 117 115 2019-09-07T17:34:39Z Dan 2 /* How do I use Tags? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == How do I use Tags? == To create and delete tags [[File:Open tag selector.png|frameless]] == How do I change my currency settings? == 0e76a223cca9555f2e2e3791df5088674d6ceba8 6 27 116 2019-09-07T17:32:26Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki Button to open the tag selector a41fe5a22df68a39ebbc77a0973b455399f78e50 8 28 122 2019-09-07T18:03:13Z Howard 1 Created page with "CatalogIt Help" wikitext text/x-wiki CatalogIt Help 3776f9f2de5b0610c1946f80e1cd27bff07af869 8 29 123 2019-09-07T18:03:38Z Howard 1 Created page with "Welcome to CatalogIt Help" wikitext text/x-wiki Welcome to CatalogIt Help 244c2009677e55fd0292802ab369eb42eb3fb3ef 127 123 2019-09-07T18:06:14Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki CatalogIt Help 3776f9f2de5b0610c1946f80e1cd27bff07af869 8 30 124 2019-09-07T18:04:03Z Howard 1 Created page with "CatalogIt Help" wikitext text/x-wiki CatalogIt Help 3776f9f2de5b0610c1946f80e1cd27bff07af869 0 31 126 2019-09-07T18:05:15Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Main Page]] to [[CatalogIt Help]] wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[CatalogIt Help]] 1296273c6b1680ed628d4f3c9fbdbffe065c2abb 6 15 134 77 2019-09-07T18:48:47Z Dan 2 Dan uploaded a new version of [[File:Profile Replace.mp4]] wikitext text/x-wiki Profile Replace video ee90866c66b04f0b8691f0fc87c7a71f2643a789 0 9 137 45 2019-09-07T19:20:20Z Dan 2 /* Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry (Smartphone OR Tablet) == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yX_WlQQt6oQ }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create an entry using your smartphone or tablet. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GVh4B8KYf2o&t=5s }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. c9c1ef34a17ba747ac42be234795d8fde58beb23 6 32 140 2019-09-07T21:01:05Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki An arrow pointing to the Tags icon within the Edit Entry screen 5ce2371276efc47b5630faf69050e7af27e712b2 6 33 144 2019-09-07T21:35:44Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki Brief video showing how to download an image 6be5de0c10706b0cd7434e0380eb462e2b7c4b45 6 34 146 2019-09-07T21:40:41Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki Brief video showing the process of creating and using a Tag 7b385bff5218e10f1985baff4e73cce13cbeda2b 6 35 150 2019-09-08T02:01:19Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Classification Chooser 77627d38aee61b1e87c26ef58a140795f633402b 6 36 152 2019-09-08T02:15:37Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Icon for video help content d95e9079a2630cc29034fdbc4e43efcff4055c24 0 3 155 154 2019-09-08T02:19:24Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 57eedaed849f29cabfcaee3342891f3d62ff04db 156 155 2019-09-08T02:21:13Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode Edit entry.png Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 1640af833a7aca923288e99bd23edba1095370e3 158 156 2019-09-08T02:26:08Z Howard 1 /* Editing an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. Add photo.png If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 67902e4ce293ae0b328e3a91aced47054dc95ff2 160 158 2019-09-08T02:32:15Z Howard 1 /* Managing Photos and PDFs */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Move photo.png The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 0fe51bc813f17b628af78ee6bf790c2e215f5de6 162 160 2019-09-08T02:41:06Z Howard 1 /* Managing Photos and PDFs */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. Delete photo.png Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 4cf94cd8be4f414ad4ba05fd588b9d3173030aee 164 162 2019-09-08T02:48:01Z Howard 1 /* Managing Photos and PDFs */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. Delete entry.png == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 946bab499f1400c180dac41c797817dd93ba7851 166 164 2019-09-08T02:51:50Z Howard 1 /* Deleting an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|thumb]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 1106d5fe6fe0527623e06f7d9c6e6dd64a4e3321 167 166 2019-09-08T02:53:05Z Howard 1 /* Deleting an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “New Folder…”. Enter a name for your new Folder. Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 0ab73099384ff38338dc69800c4444e322c57844 170 167 2019-09-08T15:08:52Z Howard 1 /* Creating a New Folder */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose "Settings." Next, select "Default Settings." Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 0ba9216a1e85fe6a5b26fd97066ac30988ab7b6b 171 170 2019-09-08T15:09:29Z Howard 1 /* Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Settings.” Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 11c7cf434662634c507550ae86d3e03bc8d5d377 172 171 2019-09-08T15:09:43Z Howard 1 /* Email, Password, and Other Settings */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 18aa746ec2dda366ab97945d710c472217c69e29 173 172 2019-09-08T15:09:59Z Howard 1 /* Getting Help */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at support@catalogit.app 42ee71cb80bed494fc470c981adf9defca3194a0 174 173 2019-09-08T15:10:22Z Howard 1 /* Getting Help */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to email your question to us at [[support@catalogit.app|CatalogIt Support]] 2c456806af48e835e13dcde44cc5c47f34a92f2d 175 174 2019-09-08T15:11:32Z Howard 1 /* Getting Help */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] f1eba61c3f62be00830d3fd58da0dc30949c19ee 176 175 2019-09-08T15:12:38Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|18px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] a16f8396285ae38739c6c76a07d8bfa37ee384ba 177 176 2019-09-08T15:12:53Z Howard 1 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video To add a new photo: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] f1eba61c3f62be00830d3fd58da0dc30949c19ee 180 177 2019-09-08T18:36:32Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] da4b37eb0bb9cccaf29daace359b7c93b58441c9 181 180 2019-09-08T22:25:49Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. To create a new Folder: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 16e99e276e54e602abd6b957f4ace086458df004 182 181 2019-09-09T00:53:51Z Dan 2 /* Creating a New Folder */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] db611c83ba35fe0f013352d404a19aac4dbc24dc 183 182 2019-09-09T00:55:45Z Dan 2 /* Email, Password, and Other Settings */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] bcf09e245ccec2302c9a4cfa0687a7f53f025f11 186 183 2019-09-10T23:26:23Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder, once you begin to create them), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 2bfe1387db8e824b438b39e6ba84cb693e616039 187 186 2019-09-10T23:27:14Z Dan 2 /* Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 06e1c67adad5ca4653a10eaee12bff5f64727053 6 37 157 2019-09-08T02:25:47Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Edit an entry using the pencil icon 3a78893a4537edb75cb446d4280f26eec4d5ebfc 6 38 159 2019-09-08T02:31:37Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Add photo to existing entry 968ae93bbf4f87b0d8f46e24382e5bf8480e0785 169 159 2019-09-08T15:07:38Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Add Photo.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki Add photo to existing entry 968ae93bbf4f87b0d8f46e24382e5bf8480e0785 6 39 161 2019-09-08T02:40:57Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Moving photos up and down in the entry order e2cc7c7dab4de521e248401b26f3e4302359b184 6 40 163 2019-09-08T02:47:45Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Delete photo from entry e0dd5511cff3c159b30b4998702b83253077e42a 6 41 165 2019-09-08T02:51:44Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki Delete an existing entry 40ada8cb78dcec45bf634d3645eb8c6a6d4e2fa4 6 35 168 150 2019-09-08T15:02:31Z Howard 1 Howard uploaded a new version of [[File:Classification Chooser.png]] wikitext text/x-wiki Classification Chooser 77627d38aee61b1e87c26ef58a140795f633402b 0 26 178 117 2019-09-08T18:29:58Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == How do I use Tags? == To create and delete tags [[File:Open tag selector.png|frameless]] == How do I change my currency settings? == == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach jpg, png, gif, tiff, RAW, and pdf files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. 7f5cc92c0004aedc17956de4634df8a3a7121bd2 179 178 2019-09-08T18:31:14Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach jpg, png, gif, tiff, RAW, and pdf files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. a43e8d4e7196643ba511435d090073086e1d2127 188 179 2019-09-13T22:18:59Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach jpg, png, gif, tiff, RAW, and pdf files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Second, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. 80cad316714deba7dc5a2f3d5fcd5a3e8bbffaec 189 188 2019-09-13T22:19:33Z Howard 1 /* Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach jpg, png, gif, tiff, RAW, and pdf files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. 1febb19e4c4c263e95a5c4f702c4618eed3a8dc3 0 16 184 148 2019-09-09T01:06:03Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Bar == Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections. In the meantime, here are a couple of handy tips to make more efficient use of the search bar in CatalogIt: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] e5bc934d3162d3b5607dcdab4fbe576d35e35df9 0 1 185 149 2019-09-10T23:20:49Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == Below is legacy content providing basic Wiki Help == Consult the [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents User's Guide] for information on using the wiki software. == Getting started == * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Configuration_settings Configuration settings list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:FAQ MediaWiki FAQ] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Help:Images: Image Help] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:EmbedVideo: Embed Video Help] * [https://lists.wikimedia.org/mailman/listinfo/mediawiki-announce MediaWiki release mailing list] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Localisation#Translation_resources Localise MediaWiki for your language] * [https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Manual:Combating_spam Learn how to combat spam on your wiki] b4331e0b17b84367628374b315100374c94687bc 191 185 2019-09-17T20:36:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. 00f6e503694d007078594bd3b21c942aedd56cc7 198 191 2019-09-19T22:38:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="#"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics </div> </a> <a href="#"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos </div> </a> <a href="#"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips </div> </a> <a href="#"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions </div> </a> </div> </html> == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. b897169421dac539b2f851d0bab63f4f0a96f133 199 198 2019-09-19T22:55:49Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="index.php/CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="index.php/How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="index.php/Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. 4ddc768ce149dc1c775731ffbeb588e7d6444b7f 0 9 190 137 2019-09-13T22:48:13Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GVh4B8KYf2o&t=5s }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 81b8f0c80cafc6044b5f77d3133ee9bc03dcdf19 8 2 192 2 2019-09-19T19:20:11Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } e49c509b90afb7de03f152ca9b1643589d026006 194 192 2019-09-19T19:37:01Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } dbc5a64cb2820c881a30951b14073987585165d3 195 194 2019-09-19T20:12:57Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } 0e4d26036b8cbb9d58a5339b3aa90c17821ff45f 197 195 2019-09-19T22:37:11Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; font-weight: bold; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } 59db7d9d68d34fc6b85dfd8b2aadb5dd1a1c17db 200 197 2019-09-19T22:57:34Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } 41a8916b11ab7e2548f8062b0c77647be5189e83 201 200 2019-09-19T22:58:51Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; } 65af34129e860055eb8fc468cba321f632097a8f 202 201 2019-09-19T22:59:36Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; } 1039966a7591d44dfdce8302bbee1c6ce46df250 204 202 2019-09-19T23:00:55Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 33e387342ef917d42bc680b48f416d7625eb799a 8 42 193 2019-09-19T19:21:31Z Howard 1 Created page with "/* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,5..." css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } 0c427987e0e4c8cd787ecd5d91f7efd12c26ce13 196 193 2019-09-19T22:36:32Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; font-weight: bold; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } 20fd8089ff58870ae47326fc60c4d0a97adf57b6 203 196 2019-09-19T23:00:05Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; } 485edbbb2485d39efaac653f0c39fc93d1eeb8d3 8 42 205 203 2019-09-19T23:01:21Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 669edf6ec9435c05003d721a9a4b9f4445984f7a 222 205 2019-09-20T15:09:10Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { margin: 0 0 8px 0; font-size: 16px; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } b78f0dc88ff196c1a1f077040f4f939e85c0fe85 223 222 2019-09-20T15:10:47Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { margin: 0 0 8px 0; font-size: 16px; margin: 0 !important; padding: 0 !important; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 7585b47eed9c1da5b50b147425f9c70537d66ce8 225 223 2019-09-20T15:18:11Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { margin: 0 0 16px 0; font-size: 16px; margin: 0 !important; padding: 0 !important; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 6e3dd0becd9ebd6d23221661291f90f565e10b7a 226 225 2019-09-20T15:19:03Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; flex-grow: 1; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { font-size: 16px; margin: 0 0 16px 0 !important; padding: 0 !important; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 03afda3511c8594e31ccdfed933283712c3f8394 236 226 2019-09-20T19:02:32Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will affect users of the mobile site */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; -webkit-box-flex: 1; -webkit-flex-grow: 1; -ms-flex-positive: 1; flex-grow: 1; -webkit-flex-shrink: 0; -ms-flex-negative: 0; flex-shrink: 0; width: 100%; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; border: 1px solid #999; margin-bottom: 16px; height: 200px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { font-size: 16px; margin: 0 0 16px 0 !important; padding: 0 !important; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 8586f9fba1b3727265e9335420b28ef31275eb98 0 1 206 199 2019-09-19T23:03:11Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="index.php/Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="index.php/Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. 0b668e077bf464accb9f3cb59396a62c8d526f3b 207 206 2019-09-19T23:03:36Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __TOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. 1e990fb0c7e1a1ccbd8375f2e514c01dfbd7d6f3 208 207 2019-09-19T23:09:20Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. e9c1b57ebaf9858815424c0666709e98574abab7 209 208 2019-09-19T23:09:56Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. 23795ce9a53b9110562fd0f54321abcce32b3bde 210 209 2019-09-19T23:11:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 3015c48983f7f0b5a55e4c7fae80223b6066de4a 211 210 2019-09-19T23:13:07Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. ce6d120d6e52ca3ef37b700c120d3a78896031ee 213 211 2019-09-19T23:15:37Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. [[File:Logo-black|400px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 92a65de63eb219bdb35711b3c60d5a449b4c50b0 214 213 2019-09-19T23:16:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. [[File:Logo-black.png|400px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 366ad14aea1dfb5cfa3b8ff3d98a6e21fa3d87d0 215 214 2019-09-19T23:17:14Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <br /> CatalogIt Basics <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <br /> How-To Videos <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <br /> Quick Tips <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <br /> Frequently Asked Questions <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. e0a7248932cc35cc2fd17aa8003486923a4825b0 217 215 2019-09-20T14:58:32Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. f0a3e73d53f364a095a6498284e5e9050560f9df 224 217 2019-09-20T15:16:47Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. c072aca90b915fc604007ac83729e53a5a436c03 229 224 2019-09-20T15:25:10Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 283b92963fee72d3261124feee0e30ed39813766 232 229 2019-09-20T15:27:06Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. a02cc774e634a8bda1e7485623412eeeb22aadf6 235 232 2019-09-20T15:29:03Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resource on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 6a91557c70f370dce8a5d28588c98284173a7ef0 250 235 2019-10-23T17:10:42Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 56ce4ba892b32915ded09c23b7dc73dc762e5cee 6 43 212 2019-09-19T23:14:42Z Howard 1 Logo Black wikitext text/x-wiki == Summary == Logo Black 4d949176b497fb0118ddee53ad4de4d1b97c8dbc 8 2 216 204 2019-09-19T23:33:29Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } e86fcca0af625bff5c7c97719c8a1938929607e3 218 216 2019-09-20T15:01:44Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav h2 { text-decoration:none; font-size: 18px; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 8b8f0fb0399e67b5fe64ed914dbc41ea427ab7a1 219 218 2019-09-20T15:03:34Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav h2 { text-decoration:none; border: none; margin: 0; font-size: 16px; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 200px; height: 200px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } a6fc4ecec7f6c9fb4091abba63fd09e5e8344083 220 219 2019-09-20T15:04:50Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav h2 { text-decoration:none; border: none; margin: 0; font-size: 16px; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 220px; height: 220px; border: 1px solid #999; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } ec24a1b2d97af11b707d99e62f2d7d6a86600f81 221 220 2019-09-20T15:06:53Z Howard 1 css text/css /* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */ @import url('https://fonts.googleapis.com/css?family=Roboto:100,300,400,500,700,900,100italic,300italic,400italic,500italic,700,700italic,900italic'); body { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif; } h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, a, table { font-family: 'Roboto', sans-serif !important; } .cit-home-nav { display: -webkit-box; display: -webkit-flex; display: -ms-flexbox; display: flex; -webkit-flex-wrap: wrap; -ms-flex-wrap: wrap; flex-wrap: wrap; } .cit-home-nav a { color: inherit; text-decoration: none; margin: 8px; font-weight: bold; } .cit-home-nav div { text-align: center; width: 220px; height: 220px; border: 1px solid #999; padding-top: 8px; } .cit-home-nav h2 { text-decoration:none; border: none; margin: 0 0 16px 0; font-size: 16px; } .cit-home-nav p { font-weight: 400; font-size: smaller; margin: 0 8px; } 0b2e947b785cf74debde7917b1f03d0d3e8b44e2 0 16 227 184 2019-09-20T15:23:51Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Quick Tips]] to [[CatalogIt Quick Tips]]: Include CatalogIt in title wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Bar == Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections. In the meantime, here are a couple of handy tips to make more efficient use of the search bar in CatalogIt: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] e5bc934d3162d3b5607dcdab4fbe576d35e35df9 237 227 2019-09-20T19:07:05Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to perform for exact searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] 0a2857118bcb998f23c24ba4dd5bbc6d556116af 238 237 2019-09-20T19:07:31Z Howard 1 /* Searching for Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] f0c01e4c779940600aab02a46351aff3e13e6e1a 240 238 2019-09-20T21:09:23Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! 34e76baa043f300038bc82e4fb36ecf7a6318bc7 242 240 2019-09-20T21:19:06Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] 1bb0cc2d7bbe073c13e301577febb3499b2714f7 251 242 2019-10-29T22:46:03Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. a2ac4a8f8eb7851ce336683d5115a34ba4a7fb9c 253 251 2019-11-06T19:11:56Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|thumb|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] ae97442bc0ac9bc690304dc58d5f2314dc8c43cf 254 253 2019-11-10T18:23:36Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Searching for Entries == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] 0de637d8d609952b776264074d5fe5bb46e6cf8e 0 44 228 2019-09-20T15:23:51Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Quick Tips]] to [[CatalogIt Quick Tips]]: Include CatalogIt in title wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[CatalogIt Quick Tips]] 72d8e4b1b7e86ecbfa1f8ceb005bdc22550310dd 0 9 230 190 2019-09-20T15:26:42Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[How-To Videos]] to [[CatalogIt How-To Videos]]: Adding CatalogIt to title wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GVh4B8KYf2o&t=5s }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 81b8f0c80cafc6044b5f77d3133ee9bc03dcdf19 249 230 2019-10-22T22:18:21Z Dan 2 /* Creating and Editing Folders */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders, Entries, and Profiles == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. b4b191cd5a97eae9a34a3caf191f7188667262ae 0 45 231 2019-09-20T15:26:42Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[How-To Videos]] to [[CatalogIt How-To Videos]]: Adding CatalogIt to title wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[CatalogIt How-To Videos]] f997293f0dc9073f882275e56c8be5c17b2db37e 0 26 233 189 2019-09-20T15:28:30Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]] to [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]]: Adding CatalogIt to title wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach jpg, png, gif, tiff, RAW, and pdf files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. 1febb19e4c4c263e95a5c4f702c4618eed3a8dc3 243 233 2019-09-23T23:07:35Z Howard 1 /* What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. 46db1eff27e85a768544c3c7fc291479e8340dc6 244 243 2019-09-23T23:11:30Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. 83e822aafbf00986f5fa94ad91060a85c10e0214 245 244 2019-09-30T17:02:19Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. 46367e88ff1f9f70ac8c723266cf9f14f87cce85 246 245 2019-10-17T00:14:46Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) "small" medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small medium-quality images sometime suffer from fuzziness produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full high-res version appears clean and crisp. aa0635173269b8c2f070e9685d5c1e9d6361938d 247 246 2019-10-17T00:17:18Z Howard 1 /* Some of my images appear "fuzzy" */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) "small" medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small medium-quality images sometime suffer from fuzziness produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." 450ae0179ce0b9e2361438a2630a1d4a7f590d89 248 247 2019-10-17T22:58:39Z Dan 2 /* Some of my images appear "fuzzy" */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." ed4a578ea5f8bef766255d5211b40166206968b5 0 46 234 2019-09-20T15:28:30Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]] to [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]]: Adding CatalogIt to title wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]] 66e2cc40eab8686ba003e1e8eb6deb40e88e59d9 6 47 239 2019-09-20T20:55:49Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki A brief video showing how to create hierarchical places in CatalogIt 9e493e7bc81592dd8d86a4d33c8a9530bdf1fdc6 6 48 241 2019-09-20T21:17:54Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki A brief video demonstrating how to create hierarchical places in CatalogIt 45152dd78e7f824179e0e5163c9f22d163a485d1 6 49 252 2019-11-06T19:10:16Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki A brief video demonstrating how to add users to an existing CatalogIt subscription 9767d049f2966c74e080a050d2eddca1f193f8bd 0 16 255 254 2019-11-26T18:40:13Z Dan 2 /* Searching for Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] 6e46c6ae118414129d47f0d9b01851cc022ff6dd 259 255 2020-03-13T03:01:46Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == ab7d280af8b98cc67f6ff475e0581cd4f52b0ad9 261 259 2020-03-15T00:01:16Z Howard 1 /* Process Templates */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] 9b8e3c8f04955f43e8452abcab34b5b2bc09068b 262 261 2020-03-18T23:21:38Z Howard 1 /* Process Templates */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == === Sample Templates === Add any text you want.... [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] 2e9b50e0785c67b9dafff099978db29761f285c3 263 262 2020-03-18T23:22:00Z Howard 1 /* Sample Templates */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] 9b8e3c8f04955f43e8452abcab34b5b2bc09068b 266 263 2020-04-07T23:27:04Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 870bb152be6773144aa290ae35ceed8bf4562465 267 266 2020-04-08T23:43:51Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. a1555c2b2e4e2b715ed98149bdec68754b24d1fb 269 267 2020-04-09T22:48:12Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) [[File:Pers or bus profile.png|thumb|left]] From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 5ace0a61e754357ada866b5d66a98457216872b2 270 269 2020-04-09T22:54:10Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) [[File:Pers or bus profile.png|thumb|left]] From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done [[File:Change person to bus.mov|thumb]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. ef64651d9c94a09dc83ccff38ba52413c1027cdd 271 270 2020-04-09T22:55:00Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) [[File:Pers or bus profile.png|thumb|left]] From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 5ace0a61e754357ada866b5d66a98457216872b2 272 271 2020-04-09T22:56:55Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. c7c46a7aa69b93b2a5ac556b763d8967747404da 274 272 2020-04-09T23:38:07Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- it has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|thumb]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. e9100de9f1f3e4851c329f81e6418e50877898e5 275 274 2020-04-09T23:40:09Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 840eb6d27230265192a0f5c1b1c74dbba884e66a 279 275 2020-05-03T16:49:40Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 6c97c811d469bff1331535a1785a9b5d22cb00a4 293 279 2020-12-22T22:35:50Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. f1afbc66f5706da87b9aa240d52a2a4044e55623 294 293 2020-12-22T22:37:55Z Dan 2 /* De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 4c3fcde63d08ab979968462f42b24fbedeefff7b 295 294 2020-12-22T22:39:15Z Dan 2 /* Downloading your Original Image */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. f2f76c18c2690bef86a21bf4fb0175e67ab7737f 296 295 2020-12-22T22:41:11Z Dan 2 /* Creating Hierarchical Places */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. dc4d5059f6aa3bacff5a7d0c3d210ef9207f3b70 0 9 256 249 2019-11-30T21:53:08Z Dan 2 /* Printing Folders and Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tQkRbhyT_VA }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. d0c3c7abe06a3976cc7b6868a6ba54c0b07ee1aa 257 256 2019-12-01T22:04:28Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. a3df00c9e629dacabe72323ea44db363ae4d5b5a 276 257 2020-04-16T01:28:59Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. 3dccc1992f52caff91df4daa1a5925a91ca6958f 277 276 2020-04-17T03:07:14Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating and Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 9d24d36a2207ba5a64d285c7b56a248a2012f5ae 292 277 2020-12-22T22:32:19Z Dan 2 /* Creating and Entry with your Smartphone */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. d063983bd1fec06d93bf02291f9dc1f499d64bd4 306 292 2021-02-16T18:10:30Z Dan 2 /* Creating and Editing Folders */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 8771da1fddfa788c5eb4d59ddc8b97e3f3cca1c3 0 3 258 187 2020-03-08T15:20:03Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch". Items can be moved from one Folder to another. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 7fecddc40c83fc8e9f08b6d7c543d48301e33a2f 288 258 2020-12-22T20:07:57Z Dan 2 /* CatalogIt Concepts */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 15a7509a141b751a68499b7d0c95fdea0dc7a02d 289 288 2020-12-22T20:50:34Z Dan 2 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] a4ce8085ff00d162db77443b2f94f27aa7757e69 290 289 2020-12-22T20:53:40Z Dan 2 /* Creating a New Folder */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two items Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 423118eb0bde0f21ef73fb08b5499cbe8865ed5b 291 290 2020-12-22T22:29:46Z Dan 2 /* To create a new Folder: */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. An Entry can be placed in multiple Folders and edits made to an Entry from within any Folder will apply to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 82cd354e4d3ce225bc5dec5ab70f904d2e82bbcf 305 291 2021-01-20T19:20:29Z Sasha 5 /* What is CatalogIt? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3c450a74d0b9691549ffd3e4fcf83396cdbf94f7 6 50 260 2020-03-15T00:00:25Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 0 26 264 248 2020-04-07T19:47:16Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." ff74a95af5979b04ed91ef2fc63f919e039426b6 265 264 2020-04-07T19:47:54Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." 734e5224cc13d043c8befb63aafcaf4f7d01c50e 280 265 2020-05-31T00:27:22Z Dan 2 /* What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." f526f7be7f89c2d96a8c4f188cd540f458e543ba 282 280 2020-09-30T19:39:06Z Joy 3 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." 1bc1b3e98426375f791b69334ed744e3a6f2826f 283 282 2020-11-24T23:38:34Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." bd1e2380e6670b2bcc5df8a62758b3b3ffef0eca 287 283 2020-12-10T13:23:08Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. 4d60b4235d125429930ebb55597cdf86e25ba4d6 297 287 2020-12-22T22:45:11Z Dan 2 /* What browsers does CatalogIt support? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: PastPerfect Eloquent FileMaker Pro Koha Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) Microsoft Access Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. 67ac85b025fe1fe11076d612d6f2ec9867b97451 298 297 2020-12-22T22:47:14Z Dan 2 /* Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $5/mo. to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. ecd35fc6dfc9221d80936ced901652029b776660 299 298 2020-12-22T22:48:40Z Dan 2 /* How many users can share a CatalogIt account? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. dfdd99f8ae7dfcd914ee22b7af8ebdf7cce43ed4 300 299 2020-12-22T22:49:58Z Dan 2 /* Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional monthly fee, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with an integration API or WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. 3e768d74571ee3b5a4cd8bb5dfa94b3855724f7d 301 300 2020-12-22T22:53:17Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings then can create conflicts with other users using the same credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. 35ccc25377b8c2afd48a28aa24632b41dcb8c07c 302 301 2020-12-22T22:59:10Z Dan 2 /* Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. a7d42bff28e11d2b4506c4865284f6e150895a5d 303 302 2021-01-06T18:24:00Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. 48ad859a9686cffadbf94ab07e108362eaebad82 304 303 2021-01-13T23:50:13Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. b3ae68731c8e9003f6985c72a567cb588fce9907 307 304 2021-03-08T21:13:43Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. f2947906a0fe5c1e66b4525962006a741ca876e3 6 51 268 2020-04-09T22:01:14Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki Image showing search for "Person or Business" Profile eb78e7ada10a18e80bb31114408c074456471870 0 4 281 95 2020-07-23T20:59:31Z Joy 3 /* CatalogIt Import User Guide */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = '''Caveat Emptor:''' While our import works well for very simple spreadsheets, we do recommend that we assist with the import when the data and relationships consist of more than a single spreadsheet/CSV or when multiple concepts (object, accession, donor, etc.) are contained in a single spreadsheet. When your data includes donor and source/accession profiles, hierarchical locations, repeating values, images, and other relational information we prefer to be involved This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. '''For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below).''' == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 78b9e2330f78632b59e648a293b8bf3b3ac5d512 6 54 284 2020-12-08T19:53:12Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 0 1 308 250 2021-03-10T13:53:39Z Nathan 4 adding page for list of classifications wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. bf77aebae679835d51f1753d430f7ee53d1f727e 0 56 309 2021-03-10T13:56:34Z Nathan 4 Created page with "{| class="wikitable sortable" |- ! Classification ! Desscription ! Parent |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or create..." wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable sortable" |- ! Classification ! Desscription ! Parent |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || || Archive |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose || Collectable |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil pen or crayon rather than paint especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials borders (marginalia) and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Print || Art made from a process invovling printing normally on paper usually for the purpose creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- | Sculpture || A three dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing print collage) || Art |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Basket || Basket made for use trade or sale || ObjectArtifact |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought be collectors || Entry |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence || Entry |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Botany || The study and classification of plants || Entry |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Moment || Moments are entries with photos and notes of anything - everyday life || Entry |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | Brass || A musical instrument that produces sound by sympathetic vibration of air in a tubular resonator in sympathy with the vibration of the player&#39;s lips; also called labrosones || MusicalInstrument |- | Keyboard || A musical instrument played using a keyboard a row of levers which are pressed by the fingers; the most common are the piano organ and various electronic keyboards including synthesizers and digital pianos || MusicalInstrument |- | Percussion || A musical instrument that is sounded by being struck or scraped by a beater including attached or enclosed beaters or rattles struck scraped or rubbed by hand or struck against another similar instrument || MusicalInstrument |- | String || A Musical instruments that produce sound from vibrating strings when the performer plays or sounds the strings in some manner; string instruments stringed instruments or chordophones || MusicalInstrument |- | Woodwind || A musical instrument that produces sound by splitting an exhaled air stream on a sharp edge such as a reed or a fipple. There are two main types of woodwind instruments: flutes and reed instruments; common examples include flute clarinet oboe saxophone and bassoon. || MusicalInstrument |- | Native American Object || An item of Native American manufacture || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Native American Basket || Native American basket made for use trade or sale || Collectable |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Native American Pottery || Ceramic of Native American manufacture and/or decoration || Ceramics |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use || Collectable |- | Photograph || An image captured through the use of a camera || Collectable |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features cities roads etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Publication || A published work- a book pamphlet map piece of music or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Crocheted Textile || The fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || The fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || The fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || The fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Tufted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads are interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile truck bus or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car truck bicycle or cart. || Collectable |- | Basic Entry || Basic root entry || |} 6dad16973282050325da4216e60a56d1776b9d77 310 309 2021-03-10T13:58:58Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable sortable" |- ! Classification ! Desscription ! Parent |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || || Archive |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose || Collectable |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil pen or crayon rather than paint especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials borders (marginalia) and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Print || Art made from a process invovling printing normally on paper usually for the purpose creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- | Sculpture || A three dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing print collage) || Art |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Basket || Basket made for use trade or sale || ObjectArtifact |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought be collectors || Entry |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence || Entry |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Botany || The study and classification of plants || Entry |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Moment || Moments are entries with photos and notes of anything - everyday life || Entry |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | Native American Object || An item of Native American manufacture || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Native American Basket || Native American basket made for use trade or sale || Collectable |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Native American Pottery || Ceramic of Native American manufacture and/or decoration || Ceramics |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use || Collectable |- | Photograph || An image captured through the use of a camera || Collectable |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features cities roads etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Publication || A published work- a book pamphlet map piece of music or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Crocheted Textile || The fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || The fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || The fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || The fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Tufted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads are interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile truck bus or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car truck bicycle or cart. || Collectable |- | Basic Entry || Basic root entry || |} 36d09e8281e6749ea8a81be0fac4bc1fdc212f70 311 310 2021-03-10T14:00:54Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable sortable" |- ! Classification ! Desscription ! Parent |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || || Archive |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose || Collectable |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil pen or crayon rather than paint especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials borders (marginalia) and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Print || Art made from a process invovling printing normally on paper usually for the purpose creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- | Sculpture || A three dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing print collage) || Art |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Basket || Basket made for use trade or sale || ObjectArtifact |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought be collectors || Entry |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence || Entry |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Botany || The study and classification of plants || Entry |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Moment || Moments are entries with photos and notes of anything - everyday life || Entry |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | Bark Basket || Item constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Native American Basket || Native American basket made for use trade or sale || Collectable |- | Coiled Basket || Item constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Native American Pottery || Ceramic of Native American manufacture and/or decoration || Ceramics |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use || Collectable |- | Photograph || An image captured through the use of a camera || Collectable |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features cities roads etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Publication || A published work- a book pamphlet map piece of music or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Crocheted Textile || The fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || The fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || The fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || The fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Tufted Textile || || WovenTextile |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads are interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile truck bus or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car truck bicycle or cart. || Collectable |- | Basic Entry || Basic root entry || |} 26b59e3ff69f7adfc5b7cc8dc559a7941e315ca5 312 311 2021-03-15T20:22:05Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- | -- || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} a1ef09493e35f4a4b885cb85dbd02ca8ee424177 313 312 2021-03-15T20:30:36Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! background-color:#ffffcc;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 51a19c1ece77c7b3da8e386b675a3c2804c10e71 314 313 2021-03-15T20:31:07Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! background-color:#ffffcc;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 58ae310a06a181a744c24abc3560ae5dea40b5ce 315 314 2021-03-15T20:32:13Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! "background-color:#ffffcc;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 724c91f1fa64c7f3906c2979eaa289cfc0cb3b60 316 315 2021-03-15T20:33:05Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px; background-color:#ffffcc;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 0690b0afb4443dd29abf8a3877d124c10bb1c08a 317 316 2021-03-15T20:33:51Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- | -- || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- | -- || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- | -- || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- | -- || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- | -- || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- | -- || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 782ccce77dd52f26bdf57495f0b4a43931633b02 318 317 2021-03-15T20:35:17Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectable |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectable |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectable |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectable |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectable |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectable |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectable |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 924e6839618574a06ca91536b0ed1da2c66940b9 342 318 2021-07-26T21:21:46Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 18a28697a709be318168ffe681f3e930c51e1271 354 342 2021-09-10T15:36:16Z Nathan 4 adding firearm to the list wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 13928e1466da807742f0e663fe77e2c9f2c07709 355 354 2021-09-10T15:36:47Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 87534e2d047412d146795a2bda7c160b8d9c0469 0 16 319 296 2021-03-16T18:18:28Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 41951f52b4ed1d9359cc68851712e661a5a7677a 320 319 2021-03-22T22:13:37Z Dan 2 /* Using the Search Function */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow" == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 1b62e454019b576735df515cf2ff3222e0d30335 321 320 2021-03-22T22:15:40Z Dan 2 /* Using the Search Function */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to a Business Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that a Business Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Business" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Business Profiles) * From within "Person or Business" you can search for any Person or Business Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 47945d558cbcab48b3918f8ea58ef0d402dce6f6 333 321 2021-04-22T17:40:19Z Dan 2 /* Changing a Person Profile to a Organization Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create your Tags, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags. Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 9eccd2293ef2162d635440b5686077f1dc7bf596 334 333 2021-05-25T00:22:08Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create To create a Tag from the Profiles screen, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag from the Profiles screen: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 8eb6e7457f152f62e4718ffdf43e11a0c75be2cd 336 334 2021-05-25T00:27:15Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen [[File:Create Tags.png|thumb]] * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create To create a Tag from the Profiles screen, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag from the Profiles screen: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. ab54b1128182838443c64f44c8e4d5c356bd1dae 337 336 2021-05-25T00:31:11Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen [[File:Create Tags.png|400px]] * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create To create a Tag from the Profiles screen, follow these steps: * from the Main Menu (the three horizontal bars in the upper left) select "Profiles" * select the "Tags" icon * click on the + button in the upper right to create your Tags Once you've created them here they will be available to you when you are creating or editing an Entry. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating and using a Tag from the Profiles screen: [[File:Create a Tag.mp4|600px|Create and Use A Tag]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 4ab600abee83fc09d88742cfe513fe2b873734ca 339 337 2021-05-25T00:55:49Z Dan 2 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create a Tag in Entry.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing a Profile.mov|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 95ddbafe189edfdc2bea8071b2b4e10a139e334c 350 339 2021-07-27T22:40:28Z Howard 1 /* Editing a Profile */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create a Tag in Entry.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 2a685bd19fed47e129292f08fe154242530f313c 352 350 2021-07-27T22:41:16Z Howard 1 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. a85d154929a697993d9221bb4c3c3ea52f1f66d0 358 352 2021-09-21T23:01:04Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." field, click the "+" button at the right side of the field * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. ec9119d9964c96d383a2e144b11d57e38c32c35e 359 358 2021-09-21T23:02:38Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." field, click the "+" button at the right side of the field * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. f10539d1f0d4882c1472308b43d7b5336ca3fb32 361 359 2021-09-28T16:17:17Z Howard 1 /* Using the Hierarchical Category Profile */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization and Conservator Accounts include five users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 4bb3038e4e46ebca78bbdd594e423dfe17c6ef89 0 9 322 306 2021-03-23T02:38:01Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/jhcJMi8FDss }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. ff6d66dd772e0217b9443ac19816edac5da5c3dd 323 322 2021-03-23T15:10:39Z Dan 2 /* Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 4cd2c247bfad36b5bba2759863783e4a98accea2 357 323 2021-09-21T20:23:49Z Dan 2 Easily create Avery labels from your CatalogIt data, including QR codes wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Printing Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. bafc1a152b2cc3c8e64cc7dec3dad5c1933d7a1b 360 357 2021-09-21T23:44:47Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. b10f44f01eb1a9113410d32c23b81235835e2731 0 1 324 308 2021-03-31T18:24:45Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 051e18c2aeb77141c82252db57f1234639da9c16 325 324 2021-03-31T18:25:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. bf77aebae679835d51f1753d430f7ee53d1f727e 328 325 2021-03-31T18:27:07Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 051e18c2aeb77141c82252db57f1234639da9c16 331 328 2021-04-03T16:35:52Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [https://www.catalogit.app [File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 05a98fc55c355b82d3439705f60ff32eaefafc9b 332 331 2021-04-03T16:37:59Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-black.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 051e18c2aeb77141c82252db57f1234639da9c16 344 332 2021-07-27T18:42:28Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-no-padding.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to catalog and manage your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. fc6b98d0f072f78eee6593e0c00d5485eb45f181 345 344 2021-07-27T19:10:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki __NOTOC__ [[File:Logo-no-padding.png|300px|frameless]] <div style="margin-top:8px;"><strong><em>The most powerful way to manage and enjoy your collections.</em></strong></div> Welcome to the CatalogIt Support Wiki. Here you will find information and resources on how to use CatalogIt. <html> <div class="cit-home-nav"> <a href="CatalogIt_Basics"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm-13.45 6h10.62v1.55H5.26zm13.48 10.6H5.26v-1.51h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.53h13.48zm0-3H5.26v-1.5h13.48zm0-6H5.26V5.21h13.48z"/></svg>' /> <h2>CatalogIt Basics</h2> <p>The basics of using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_How-To_Videos"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M18.71 2.19H5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1 3.1v13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1 3.1h13.42a3.1 3.1 0 003.1-3.1V5.29a3.1 3.1 0 00-3.1-3.1zm0 13.16a.25.25 0 01-.38.22l-3-1.75v1.3a1 1 0 01-1 1.05h-8a1 1 0 01-1-1.05V8.88a1 1 0 011-1.05h8a1 1 0 011 1.05v1.3l3-1.75a.25.25 0 01.38.22z"/></svg>' /> <h2>How-To Videos</h2> <p>Instructional videos on using CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Quick_Tips"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg id="Layer_1" data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><title>Artboard 25</title><path d="M17.65,3H6.35A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,2.78,6.57v14a.44.44,0,0,0,.59.41l6.06-2.3h8.22a3.57,3.57,0,0,0,3.57-3.57V6.57A3.57,3.57,0,0,0,17.65,3ZM12.79,6.38l-.15,6.47H11.32l-.15-6.47Zm-.15,9a1,1,0,0,1-1.28,0,.78.78,0,0,1-.23-.57.85.85,0,0,1,.23-.6,1,1,0,0,1,1.28,0,.85.85,0,0,1,.23.6A.78.78,0,0,1,12.64,15.4Z"/></svg>'/> <h2>Quick Tips</h2> <p>Quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> <a href="CatalogIt_Frequently_Asked_Questions"> <div> <img width="120" height="120" style="width:120px" src='data:image/svg+xml;utf8,<svg data-name="Layer 1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 24 24"><path d="M12 3a9 9 0 109 9 9 9 0 00-9-9zm0 15.05a1.24 1.24 0 111.24-1.24A1.24 1.24 0 0112 18.05zm2.2-6.27a4 4 0 00-1.35 3h-1.74a5.8 5.8 0 011.94-4.31 1.58 1.58 0 00.48-1.55 1.54 1.54 0 00-1.15-1.14 1.56 1.56 0 00-2 1.52H8.66a3.34 3.34 0 115.57 2.49z"/></svg>' /> <h2>Frequently Asked Questions</h2> <p>Frequently asked questions about CatalogIt.</p> </div> </a> </div> </html> <html><!-- == [[CatalogIt Basics]] == This section covers the basics of using CatalogIt. == [[How-To Videos]] == Instructional videos on using CatalogIt. == [[ Quick Tips ]] == A list of quick tips on how to do things in CatalogIt. == [[ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ]] == A list of frequently asked questions about CatalogIt. --></html> == [[Importing Data]] == Detailed instructions on how to import external data into CatalogIt and how to prepare data for import. == [[Classifications]] == A full list of available classifications. Classifications are the groups of characteristics used to catalog items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. == About CatalogIt == CatalogIt is an intuitive and powerful app created for cataloging and managing collections, and for publishing to the Web. It has the depth to satisfy serious museum professionals, is rich in classifications to delight the private collector, and is user-friendly and approachable for volunteers and docents. CatalogIt is designed to tell the Story of Things. Each story begins with a single item — where, how, and by whom it was made; what it was used for; and how it came to be where it is today. As an item’s story unfolds, it is enriched with relationships to other items, people, and places based on shared physical characteristics and history. CatalogIt makes it easy to discover those interconnected stories, record them in detail, and present them in an accessible, inspiring format. 2532047414ab8b7be77a29bec50ab109ba198ff5 0 26 326 307 2021-03-31T18:26:31Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]] to [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions]]: Don't want the "(FAQ)" at the end wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes five users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. f2947906a0fe5c1e66b4525962006a741ca876e3 329 326 2021-04-01T00:06:58Z Dan 2 /* How many users can share a CatalogIt account? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 100 Entries. When an Account exceeds 100 Entries, CatalogIt offers paid subscriptions. Annual subscription prices start at $120/year for a Personal Account up to 2,500 Entries, and at $360/year for a Museum Account for up to 25,000 Entries. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 80bea090f60f2d8b5b9592dcabfd50d2fd1aaf09 330 329 2021-04-01T00:12:26Z Dan 2 /* How much does CatalogIt cost? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugins to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. b1c3ddbee03136cf83524ee086427c6fb2dcf939 356 330 2021-09-11T22:28:20Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 6e8acddb47c70f63becba04823e2ded9a1e5a748 0 57 327 2021-03-31T18:26:31Z Howard 1 Howard moved page [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)]] to [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions]]: Don't want the "(FAQ)" at the end wikitext text/x-wiki #REDIRECT [[CatalogIt Frequently Asked Questions]] aaaeeea8d1a8d9e05c8cbb53a84eff9df7f393d1 6 58 335 2021-05-25T00:26:58Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki This image illustrates how to create a new Tag 2f9452b5bce3a1cc96f64db779b75f36c33eb5a5 0 4 340 281 2021-06-11T17:24:23Z Dan 2 /* CatalogIt Import User Guide */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = '''Caveat Emptor:''' While our import works well for very simple spreadsheets, we do recommend that we assist with the import when the data and relationships consist of more than a single spreadsheet/CSV or when multiple concepts (object, accession, donor, etc.) are contained in a single spreadsheet. When your data includes donor and source/accession profiles, hierarchical locations, repeating values, images, and other relational information we prefer to be involved. This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. '''For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below).''' == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] ''Exception:'' There is one instance when you may select a bold “branch” property when mapping your import columns to the CatalogIt Property tree. If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 2f63d18f095276458e49c83446e97d926ed01421 341 340 2021-06-17T17:12:06Z Howard 1 /* Select Leaf Properties Only */ wikitext text/x-wiki = CatalogIt Import User Guide = '''Caveat Emptor:''' While our import works well for very simple spreadsheets, we do recommend that we assist with the import when the data and relationships consist of more than a single spreadsheet/CSV or when multiple concepts (object, accession, donor, etc.) are contained in a single spreadsheet. When your data includes donor and source/accession profiles, hierarchical locations, repeating values, images, and other relational information we prefer to be involved. This user guide explains the CatalogIt Import process and the steps you can take to avoid pitfalls. Import is fairly robust and capable but does require understanding some basic principles and limitations to ensure success. The UI is functional but still needs some basic design attention and polishing. The data importing happens independently on the backend; as new Entries are created they are pushed to the frontend or client. Because of the independent and decoupled nature of how importing works, error reporting occurs via emails. If your counts after an import are not correct (or they are not what you expect) that is usually a sign that the import failed to complete successfully and you should look for an email containing details about the error(s). If an import fails mid-process any Entries that were already created will remain; you will need to delete them, correct the issue(s) in your source import data, and reimport. '''For this reason, importing into the “All Entries” Folder is not permitted -- you can only import into a Folder you’ve created (this is discussed in more detail below).''' == Prepare your Data == You can import data from either an Excel spreadsheet file (.xls and .xlsx) or from a CSV file (.csv). CSV is a universal format and many applications allow for export in CSV format. Import File Requirements * Make sure that the first row is the header row. Each cell in this row should contain the “title” describing the information in each cell in that column. * Make sure that all the data describing a single item, which will populate a single CatalogIt Entry, is in only one row and that there are no ‘merged’ cells. * Remove blank rows at the bottom of your data or between rows of your data. Totally blank rows will be skipped by the import process but it’s best practice to keep your import data clean and as small as possible. == Classifications == CatalogIt contains a rich set of Classifications for modeling items (Art, Publication, Photograph, Object/Artifact, etc). You will want to divide your data into its basic Classification types and import each Classification set (a group of items all of one Classification type) separately. For instance, you’ll want to create a separate .csv file for artwork items to import into the CatalogIt “Art” Classification, another .csv file for your archival materials to import into the CatalogIt “Archive” Classification, yet another for “Object/Artifacts”, etc. You will import each of these files individually into CatalogIt to ensure a clean, comprehensive, high-fidelity import and to leave you in the best position for continuing to catalog these various types of items. == Import into new Folder == To import, you will need to either create a new Folder by selecting ‘New Folder’ from the Main Menu or map into another Folder you’ve previously created. We recommend creating a new Folder. Note: you cannot import into your CatalogIt “All Entries” Folder by design, as your All Entries Folder cannot be deleted. If there is a mistake while importing, you can simply delete a newly-created Folder and all of the Entries within it, re-create the new Folder, and re-import your file. Once you are ready to import, click on the Actions Menu in the upper right corner of your Folder and select “Import.” == New Records Only; No Updates == When importing Entries, the import process currently only "creates" new Entry records and will not "update" any existing records (or Entries). Some users reasonably think that if they're mapping the Entry/Object-ID, it should serve as an identifier and perform an update if the entry already exists. We're going to add support for “insert or update” (via a setting) but it's not currently part of the import functionality. If you have unique object IDs enabled (as most Museum accounts do) and you attempt to import the same file a second time (and you are mapping the Entry/Object ID), the import will fail from the attempt to add a duplicate entry (and you’ll receive an email stating as much). == Importing Entries and Profiles == You can import both Entries and Profiles. If you have Profiles that include a rich set of information (i.e. People, Businesses, Accessions, etc) you can import them in addition to importing the actual Entries. If you have Profiles to import, you’ll typically import them first by going to Profiles from the Main Menu and selecting the Profile you’ll be importing into. When importing Entries you’ll reference the Profile via its “name” property (Profile names must be unique)-- i.e. your Entry import data will contain a column that references the Profile’s name and you’ll map this column to the appropriate Profile field. == Select Leaf Properties Only == When configuring your mappings you must map your columns to "leaf" properties in the Property tree. “Leaf” properties have no children vs. “branch” properties which have children indented below them. [[File:Select_Leaf_Properties.png|frameless,300px|Select Leaf Nodes Only]] === Dimensions === '''''Exception:''''' If you have a single import column that contains multiple dimensions (like 15”w X 10”h) you can select the Dimension branch item and CatalogIt will attempt to intelligently parse that field and automatically identify and set the individual dimensions; if any dimensions are uninterpretable, the original import value will be written to the Dimension Notes field. This is an exception to always selecting a "leaf" property in the CatalogIt Property tree when mapping an import column. '''TIP:''' Mapping to the "Notes" fields for any given section works very well - don’t be hesitant about doing that. Notice that you can also include a custom label via the “Include Label” checkbox which will serve to identify the information. [[File:Edit Labels.png|frameless,300px|Add a custom label]] At the bottom left side, you can also set options for what you’d like CatalogIt to do with problems it encounters during the process: “Ignore Errors,” “Abort on Error, ” or “Map to Notes.” Map to Notes will map the data to the nearest Notes field depending on the property you’ve mapped to. == Entry Audit Fields == The Create Date, Created By, Update Date, and Updated By fields are automatically maintained by CatalogIt which records when and which authorized user Created or Updated an Entry record. These fields ARE NOT the place to record when an Object was created; use “Made or Created -> Date made -> Date” or similar fields for that information. [[File:Audit Properties.png|frameless,300px|Create & Edit Audit Properties]] You can import to these fields if you have this information, but it’s important that you understand how these fields are different from other “Create Date” fields. == Import your Data == After you’ve finished mapping your columns, click the “Next” button in the upper right corner. This brings you to a screen where you can view all of the columns you’ve mapped and the CatalogIt fields you’ve mapped them to. If you are satisfied, click “Import” in the upper right corner, and you’ll see your import take shape. If it is particularly large (thousands of rows), it may take several minutes. You are done! == Reusing Mapping Configurations == === Save Mapping Configurations === Creating a mapping can be time-consuming so saving it for future use can be beneficial. To save a mapping configuration click the Save icon on either the mapping or confirmation step of the import process. [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] In the “Save Import Configuration” dialog that appears, enter a name for the import configuration and click SAVE. You can overwrite an existing saved configuration by entering the same name. [[File:Name Import Configuartion.png|frameless,300px|Open Saved Configuration]] The import configuration will now be available for use in subsequent imports saving you the effort of having to reconfigure the mappings. === Using Saved Configurations === If you repeatedly import the same type of data (for example, a spreadsheet with the same column headers but different row data) or you’re importing data with many columns it can be beneficial and a real time-saver to use a saved import configuration. To use an existing import configuration click the “Open” icon in the first step of the import process (the step immediately after selecting the file to import). [[File:Open Saved Configuration.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] From the “Existing Import Configuration” dialog select a previously saved configuration and click OPEN. [[File:Open Save Import Config.png|frameless,200px|Open Saved Import Configuration]] This will load the saved configuration into the new import file and use that configuration to execute the import function. You can make additional tweaks or continue directly with the import. 797571d5dd8abb36ccfcfd3c8044bed2e97eb378 6 60 343 2021-07-27T18:42:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 63 348 2021-07-27T22:38:43Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 64 349 2021-07-27T22:40:13Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 65 351 2021-07-27T22:41:01Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 0 3 353 305 2021-09-09T23:47:47Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 100 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 946c3b1fe91835dcb1d04f783f8c300621eddb6d 0 26 362 356 2021-10-19T16:23:14Z Howard 1 /* Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. At some point in our future development, perhaps a few years down the road, we may be at a stage where we can enable users to run their own instances of CatalogIt. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. b555f4e23f1e870100bff749c2310ba3f50b457b 363 362 2021-10-19T16:24:29Z Howard 1 /* Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has three permission levels: Owner, Read-Write and Read Only. When a user is added to an account, the Account Owner assigns the new user one of those three permission levels. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. c5b803c6277e9253d6956e0e2ca5d764296c1cc2 367 363 2022-02-20T00:20:13Z Dan 2 /* What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Collaborators_.28Users.29_to_your_Account|they can be found here]]. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 72f92c8e0ffc69c47b33d8eb5f26bcede98e818d 368 367 2022-02-23T15:45:46Z Dan 2 /* Can I export my data from CatalogIt? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. For an additional subscription, CatalogIt can provide Accounts with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin to publish their collection with the same controls, directly to their own public Website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Collaborators_.28Users.29_to_your_Account|they can be found here]]. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 62faa1412d3e619ac48575875280fde460dc27b6 379 368 2023-03-15T20:21:16Z Dan 2 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Collaborators_.28Users.29_to_your_Account|they can be found here]]. At present, Account Owners cannot modify permissions or create new roles. This DIY feature is coming soon, however. The Owner will be able to create new roles that control what kinds of information (entries, profiles, folders, images, etc.) a user can access, and the kind of tasks that each User can do with that information (i.e. view, create, edit, delete, etc.). The Account Owner will be able to define as many roles as they need and will be able to delete Users or reassign permissions as needs evolve. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 8b65a4c8438658997bbb75f9bbbc38f582f21e13 400 379 2024-04-22T19:10:08Z Dan 2 /* What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account|they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. 8859fc75b94a306ecf7ed70c74d8703f95f605c1 401 400 2024-04-22T19:13:10Z Dan 2 /* What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. d6aa2435cec71172b599f0134762a18cf4d69a80 406 401 2024-07-29T14:52:17Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much do CatalogIt webinars cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I playback the audio/video files attached to my entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 35c0785a62bb732b512f0759a9d5cd7d45d11dd8 407 406 2024-07-29T15:12:28Z Hunter 9 /* Can I playback the audio/video files attached to my entries? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much do CatalogIt webinars cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 157fddb8c5d4cbe6988c1fb89f63e5ed9a07d782 408 407 2024-07-29T19:27:21Z Hunter 9 /* How much do CatalogIt webinars cost? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. b20fdbfccca3992dafbf106fc5b926552e902321 409 408 2024-07-30T17:04:31Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Does the HUB track website traffic? == No - not at this time, but we are planning some big upgrades for the HUB, including traffic tracking, in the near future. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 567cbfdd2576a8ece955adb7d328ae41d226297b 410 409 2024-07-30T17:31:27Z Hunter 9 /* Does the HUB track website traffic? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. b20fdbfccca3992dafbf106fc5b926552e902321 411 410 2024-07-31T17:59:12Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 3f50a5327c354c02461f828ae34ffad989b5dc43 0 3 364 353 2021-11-05T03:11:31Z Howard 1 /* Creating a Subscription */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the entries and profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, the Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, indicate whether they should have read-only, read-write, or owner access to the account. Soon, account owners will be able to manage this process themselves, but in the meantime, we are glad to help. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 793b309ed6eea7014c271419719000521f29e616 365 364 2022-02-16T15:29:37Z Dan 2 /* Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, the level access that person should have: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove collaborators, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 909e94658981a25e68cf5a9c79811b9ee2cba067 366 365 2022-02-16T15:30:36Z Dan 2 /* Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add, and for each, the level of access that person should have: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove collaborators, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] fa320e6b42ad547812f5a089494286bc706bb6cd 374 366 2022-05-10T22:48:17Z Dan 2 /* Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Collaborators, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove collaborators, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] f8fe8b03db24831da38b77690403903d1d57c440 376 374 2023-03-15T20:10:03Z Dan 2 /* Adding Collaborators (Users) to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. You can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Uers, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove collaborators, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3881d17b393fa17a4a17055e7fb035248cca5b08 377 376 2023-03-15T20:11:46Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == How to use "Collection" and "Category" == CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “'''Collection'''” and “'''Category'''” fields, you are able to do just that. The “'''Collection'''” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The “'''Category'''” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. These are both user-defined fields. Users can create as many profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 70096e9395eac909fa757fc8a5c32edc36835aac 385 377 2023-08-22T20:31:06Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == == Structured Searching == == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 7626ae38a5fd7bf6865dc18532161463bee531f9 386 385 2023-08-22T20:32:04Z Howard 1 /* Full-text Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 2a8cfff72b87df6d89a3d0818d78a7a34217d1c9 387 386 2023-08-22T21:09:47Z Howard 1 /* Structured Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of 3 parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the Missing or Has operators do no require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup to open the compound search builder and create compound searches === Searching by Classification === You can search on classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact: Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most-recent). The Locaton field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most-recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made”. To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 071eba5493e796c0ab4ff6f7e8759c95ed7f7aba 388 387 2023-08-22T21:39:05Z Dan 2 /* Full-text Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of 3 parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the Missing or Has operators do no require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup to open the compound search builder and create compound searches === Searching by Classification === You can search on classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact: Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most-recent). The Locaton field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most-recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made”. To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 7fd017044ac450f249c17958d3e0892b4d19c211 389 388 2023-08-22T21:47:50Z Dan 2 /* Structured Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). *Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 41bd37dfe5c7afb322be7e7532a331c7470ae36f 394 389 2023-12-26T19:57:00Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot manage subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] cb039e14a180d2fa8273bcca710eea9daffeb903 395 394 2024-01-18T18:15:46Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 22fabc469885251f98547072c2fb80cfedd18bbd 397 395 2024-02-27T21:23:25Z Coral 8 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6516910241f1cfab96b739cd4e3c466aee415015 398 397 2024-02-27T21:27:31Z Coral 8 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 22fabc469885251f98547072c2fb80cfedd18bbd 399 398 2024-03-06T15:07:17Z Dan 2 /* Full-text Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 240b1c04228f5425530c15cb2af0c3e243c7a942 402 399 2024-05-20T14:01:45Z Nicoline 7 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. The access levels currently available are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 8a996dee951ff37db8777d862fec4964061943c8 403 402 2024-05-20T17:39:37Z Nicoline 7 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 32c65ab5d3a734cf5385ba9954eda5ee5c186789 404 403 2024-05-31T15:20:18Z Howard 1 /* Full-text Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are know as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6e93bda6b49a5c2ff947ec314d4f77916da0bf29 405 404 2024-05-31T15:22:11Z Howard 1 /* Full-text Searching */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has even been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 9af0ede755939b933a3ec3a832cb273e876e5d4a 0 9 369 360 2022-02-23T21:45:42Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk or Batch Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk or batch updates in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. fba3bb364fcfb2afaa01cdd9ff2d817e034d2d07 370 369 2022-02-23T21:48:04Z Dan 2 /* Bulk or Batch Operations in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk or Batch Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk or batch changes to your Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 18e7294c7156bb1fe48c0e7e1bd7ec8d3e5c694b 373 370 2022-04-19T17:23:52Z Dan 2 /* Bulk Operations in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 455050b8e83c86018661aba9d25dfef34046a9b1 391 373 2023-11-10T20:05:25Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 7d9795386ec4b5e005523f3a525f1dfd693cc2dc 0 16 371 361 2022-03-15T20:15:33Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 1630c84dfa1e2dc2267c7e89b59d34291b16b21d 372 371 2022-03-15T20:18:23Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, the access level you'd like them to have (you can see descriptions of the levels available [[CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Collaborators_.28Users.29_to_your_Account|here]]). If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add, and for each of them, whether you would like them to have Owner, Read-Write, or Read-Only capabilities. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 59803bc406c8ad8f257b2f6068b92cc63026095f 375 372 2022-06-22T20:23:10Z Dan 2 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on Name under Account Settings * Change the name and click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 0c282c25478eb760b1c8f32ec6aaeec734d81eb5 378 375 2023-03-15T20:16:46Z Dan 2 /* Changing the name of your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == Below are some helpful tips to execute more precise searches in CatalogIt. Soon CatalogIt will support “structured search” which will allow much greater precision in querying your collections-- in the interim these tips should provide a good boost. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 5c23165dc0795a8e4a4fc129bfb54880a3797aec 380 378 2023-07-03T20:05:05Z Dan 2 /* Using the Search Function */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 7ffeb5bc31e596b733f51f96afed6d59c58b8db1 381 380 2023-08-22T16:40:18Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Using Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories == We frequently get asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them. The following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “Collection” and “Category” fields, you are able to do just that. === Folders === * Organization and Navigation * Web publishing * May be easily deleted as needed * Use folders to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Create folders for researchers Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of items over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Entries can exist in as many Folders as you need them to. Folders are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. === Tags === * Post-It notes * Process management * Workflow Tags can be created and deleted as needed. === Collection Profile === The “Collection” field, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The Collection Profile is a user-defined field. Users can create as many Collection Profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. A "Collection" Profile is a handy way to relate a group of items together - and any Entry can be part of multiple Collections. You can relate items by the artist into a collection, then if/when you need to, search for that Collection and add the items to a Folder. Examples: * Named collections eg: The Daniel Peter Basket Collection * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection” or “Egyptian Textile Collection” === Category Profile === The “Category” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. The Category Profile is a user-defined field. Users can create as many Category Profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. The "Category" Profile can be used as a method to attach objects to subjects or types used by that institution eg: “housewares” “vintage kitchenware” “Modern Furniture”. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. c0bba869507fb0f885da872ab346dc79d5cfd390 382 381 2023-08-22T17:13:28Z Dan 2 /* Collection Profile */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Using Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories == We frequently get asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them. The following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. CatalogIt allows users to organize their collections in many different ways. While you are able to be very specific with your cataloging through the use of authoritative classifications, we recognize that you may organize your collections in ways that are specific to you, and with the “Collection” and “Category” fields, you are able to do just that. === Folders === * Organization and Navigation * Web publishing * May be easily deleted as needed * Use folders to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Create folders for researchers Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of items over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Entries can exist in as many Folders as you need them to. Folders are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. === Tags === * Post-It notes * Process management * Workflow Tags can be created and deleted as needed. === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to break up your own collection into distinct groups that you create and assign. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collection called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” This same item may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection” and CatalogIt allows you to include multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. The Collection Profile is a user-defined field. Users can create as many Collection Profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. A "Collection" Profile is a handy way to relate a group of items together - and any Entry can be part of multiple Collections. You can relate items by the artist into a collection, then if/when you need to, search for that Collection and add the items to a Folder. Examples: * Named collections eg: The Danielson Basket Collection * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection” or “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection." === Category Profile === The “Category” field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into categories and subcategories that you define. This is a hierarchical field that allows you to create categories and related subcategories. For example, if you are a collector of vintage household goods (like vintage crockery), you are able to create a category called “Household Goods” and a subcategory of “Kitchenware”, and a second subcategory of “dinner service” for cataloging your vintage soup tureen. The Category Profile is a user-defined field. Users can create as many Category Profiles as needed to ensure their collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to them. The "Category" Profile can be used as a method to attach objects to subjects or types used by that institution eg: “housewares” “vintage kitchenware” “Modern Furniture”. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 44d61250138d4ff58836617e8527319c1fb4149a 383 382 2023-08-22T20:04:10Z Dan 2 /* Using Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Tags, Collections, and Categories can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 0064c3a18b4ec2540659ac8373c36274211ddb5a 384 383 2023-08-22T20:26:50Z Dan 2 /* Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. cf59a10967de68260652b4520fd870b0231517f1 390 384 2023-08-22T23:39:38Z Howard 1 /* Using the Search Function */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is a special type of Profile that is essentially like the "parent" of Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 6474c4f535568643e22f589eccc760599473f5dd 392 390 2023-11-21T16:08:14Z Howard 1 /* Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. e3df0e41f50b36ba831b0990d3b29ca15163e6f4 396 392 2024-02-05T17:15:15Z Dan 2 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. 65b2c442e2fc79d2fa4d36d807990c6207634b05 0 56 393 355 2023-12-06T15:44:20Z Nathan 4 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 18b83c2cdc9e1695b3e3ce5b7a3bb041d607efed 0 26 412 411 2024-08-12T14:45:14Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. c4e3a7a1af7c716e94023c03ac3529d1046e32a8 413 412 2024-08-16T15:55:01Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. e3ccc583174a4e43d80aeb74667c7cbb76c176f9 414 413 2024-08-20T19:48:48Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 46efed6125b1098020d748193991ba3153620c3f 416 414 2024-08-29T18:50:15Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. bdd7d27309e589aeb8fa6bd6b777417a2a9ce73f 417 416 2024-08-29T18:51:03Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. 60bf562617cbf95e2e4f195a1190168d98f3842f 418 417 2024-08-29T18:52:26Z Hunter 9 /* Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the audio/video files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == No - not yet. Playback is not currently available on our system, but this is a feature we are working on and hope to implement in the near future. b1a5379f09a572cb523a99ff305fa6483fe3772b 421 418 2024-09-04T18:48:41Z Hunter 9 /* Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word and PDF files to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio, and video files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 2908e17953c6d4ba5fe6da814e32486f7f4e30a3 422 421 2024-09-04T18:50:18Z Hunter 9 /* What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes eight users; every Personal Account includes three users. Additional users can be added to any account for $6/month or $60/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 017163bdf407b5a2e1b4160b14c8cf058e2ddd6d 428 422 2024-09-06T18:38:13Z Hunter 9 /* How many users can share a CatalogIt account? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account for $8/month or $80/year to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 54ff58b29d30f582e896e43f31ae0cdc75c46e84 429 428 2024-09-06T18:41:06Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 7c11426fd15044ff9b93ae7a8d05c7470f1ba50f 430 429 2024-09-17T13:33:42Z Hunter 9 /* Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. a61d3808cf69ece0ea0000a6ffdf54199db04718 432 430 2024-09-17T14:28:38Z Hunter 9 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 5cb2b746c2e9a55134dd0841cbf8b6e602c84514 437 432 2024-09-17T20:20:00Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account| they can be found here]]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 419aaafc288073d9f7af335664742e1575892906 440 437 2024-09-24T18:43:18Z Hunter 9 /* What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 041effbbef189f6b49e4c5086351fcc93a877a8c 446 440 2024-09-29T16:19:07Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. Information on how to use the API can be found here [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf]] If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. c94c45f05539187efe31d8ec19064aae4d2b9ae2 447 446 2024-09-29T16:20:35Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. Information on how to use the API can be found here [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference]] If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 2e16d6bb351c5163e1947801b242a4948c841411 448 447 2024-09-29T16:30:15Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. Information on how to use the API can be found here [[Special:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference]] If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 13c13e6614769cfc0e41e8b9d54e5adf583f0ab7 449 448 2024-09-29T16:31:12Z Howard 1 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. Information on how to use the API can be found here [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference]] If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 2e16d6bb351c5163e1947801b242a4948c841411 450 449 2024-09-30T14:19:59Z Hunter 9 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. Guides for our different web publishing integrations can be found here: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] If you are a CatalogIt subscriber and would like to utilize the HUB please contact us at support@catalogit.app and we will enable it for your account and send you the HUB User Guide. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 830a875403c56dd503d7cf407290b27eee014e46 454 450 2024-09-30T15:03:22Z Hunter 9 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. d96f21c49114d7fcdc717286e22c30cbeb131b72 459 454 2024-09-30T19:17:54Z Hunter 9 /* How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed, but they need to reach out to us at support@catalogit.app to add new users. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 86071daea878291872dd9043e7301ae19afa7477 0 3 415 405 2024-08-21T20:56:29Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] ee04b96c940bd61c2660c8113a7a57bc68204e7d 433 415 2024-09-17T15:29:25Z Hunter 9 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] be3f10b9cdc87e0a20dd52903c3e8142c541e668 436 433 2024-09-17T16:56:54Z Hunter 9 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged. To find some tips on managing this process see our MasterIt article "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] fa82a064adda37738a1dfff5926f01d017ab8f3d 439 436 2024-09-17T20:48:09Z Hunter 9 /* Creating an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] cd8dc5c4cafc5601fef988535d7b25ce679b575b 441 439 2024-09-24T19:49:25Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - 4 digit year :M{1,2} - month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits :D{1,2} - day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits :d or ddd - 1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills) :N+ - auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001) :a+ - auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits :A+ - auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. We have developed several resources on the topic. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] ace400ea3a6b0917a61e9ee816089887d5df3c35 442 441 2024-09-24T19:50:53Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - 1 ''to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. We have developed several resources on the topic. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] f696088ccf473ac8db41ca8b70a66fceef3a29ff 443 442 2024-09-24T19:51:16Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. We have developed several resources on the topic. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 8a5644c664b7cd6f41a0d719964d0784d39295bb 444 443 2024-09-24T19:53:15Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 024628f75855ec03a01ad1c6703b4135b6a85df1 451 444 2024-09-30T14:52:51Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. CatalogIt’s HUB, WordPress plugin, iFrame integration, or API plugin make your collection publicly accessible, discoverable, searchable, and more [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access widely accessible.] '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''Publishing Your Collection Directly to Your Website''' With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Subscriptions, press the Subscribe Button, check the Integration API box, press Next, and follow the prompts. Guides for our different web publishing integrations can be found here: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] cad90070982c92a02d9c9796a191c76a4b0df8a5 452 451 2024-09-30T14:53:37Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. CatalogIt’s HUB, WordPress plugin, iFrame integration, or API plugin make your collection publicly accessible, discoverable, searchable, and more [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access widely accessible.] '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''Publishing Your Collection Directly to Your Website''' With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Subscriptions, press the Subscribe Button, check the Integration API box, press Next, and follow the prompts. Guides for our different web publishing integrations can be found here: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 10a79e715c169f1ef8574fd0806eb712d38c8e29 453 452 2024-09-30T14:54:06Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. CatalogIt’s HUB, WordPress plugin, iFrame integration, or API plugin make your collection publicly accessible, discoverable, searchable, and more [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access widely accessible.] '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Subscriptions, press the Subscribe Button, check the Integration API box, press Next, and follow the prompts. Guides for our different web publishing integrations can be found here: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 32dc8f37f39402bc2c11c9c1028ded571bdabe82 455 453 2024-09-30T15:22:45Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. CatalogIt’s HUB, WordPress plugin, iFrame integration, or API plugin make your collection publicly accessible, discoverable, searchable, and more [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access widely accessible.] '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Guides for our different web publishing integrations can be found here: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 13a1e23b2c7fb46bcd27b72780bbb32aaf90a9b6 456 455 2024-09-30T15:23:37Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. CatalogIt’s HUB, WordPress plugin, iFrame integration, or API plugin make your collection publicly accessible, discoverable, searchable, and more [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access widely accessible.] '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt can provide users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] cefa850e5ca5ef784db471cbcd85f1fe752cb09b 457 456 2024-09-30T15:26:53Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. An Account Owner can add and remove users and control the level of access each user has. To add users to your account, an Account Owner just needs to send an email to [[support@catalogit.app]] with the email address of each person they'd like to add. We will add them as "read-only" users, and the Owner can then log in, go to Settings, then Users, and change the level of access by clicking on the edit pencil next to the user. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 94bb8f7e35b06b9de19286585e40c85e9981a999 460 457 2024-10-02T14:06:15Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Thanks to an exciting new update, Account Owners can now add users on their end! To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account here on our support site.] Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 4f8e66ed572acf5014d123bc79727001fa0a4570 0 16 419 396 2024-08-30T14:00:22Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). b23f08dd2aee5db8d475f6952d923ecad20c6e98 420 419 2024-08-30T17:48:39Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). == Protecting Your Media on the HUB == To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. 61afb226e22bfa7c011b84ec90d4f857f52ac37d 431 420 2024-09-17T13:35:59Z Hunter 9 /* Duplicating Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. It is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). == Protecting Your Media on the HUB == To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. 2643eaacee6a82fcc69e3498ad31dda7bf01af9b 434 431 2024-09-17T15:42:22Z Hunter 9 /* Creating a Report from Profiles */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include eight users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, simply send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Once you've finished, send an email to support@catalogit.app and let us know the email addresses of the users you'd like to add. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). == Protecting Your Media on the HUB == To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. 02b1278db17878d2694d1289bc06126076ff17ca 461 434 2024-10-02T14:11:12Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). == Protecting Your Media on the HUB == To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. 437582cacc402cff048e834b2af584172fc62e85 0 56 423 393 2024-09-05T18:22:06Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Zoology || The study and classification of animals || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 8191cdc6eacce9f9cb8819572d506f91296eae06 424 423 2024-09-05T18:22:36Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Zoology || The study and classification of animals || Collectible |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} d3e2f12c718d851441d59c91390f8daf60aadec5 425 424 2024-09-05T18:22:56Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Zoology || The study and classification of animals || Collectible |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 58628ac2569eb929686aaf46587f29ddc07671ee 426 425 2024-09-05T18:23:21Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Zoology || The study and classification of animals || Collectible ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 70703f1bcdd8020866ea43c1530129473c879b23 427 426 2024-09-05T18:23:46Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki {| class="wikitable" |- ! Classification ! Description ! Parent |- | Art || Item created primarily for aesthetic purpose using creative skill and imagination, typically in a visual form such as painting or sculpture, producing works to be appreciated primarily for their beauty or emotional power || Collectible |- | Painting || An artwork comprised of paint applied to a surface || Art |- | Sculpture || A three-dimensional artwork typically created through carving modeling casting or construction || Art |- | Work on Paper || An artwork created on paper (drawing, print, collage) || Art |- | Collage || A piece of art made by sticking various different materials such as photographs and pieces of paper or fabric onto a backing || WorkOnPaper |- | Drawing || Art made with a pencil, pen, or crayon rather than paint, especially one drawn in monochrome || WorkOnPaper |- | Fan || A work of art on a device typically folding and shaped like a segment of a circle when spread out that is held in the hand and waved so as to cool the person holding it by causing the air to move. || WorkOnPaper |- | Illuminated Manuscript || A manuscript in which the text is supplemented with such decoration as initials, borders (marginalia), and miniature illustrations || WorkOnPaper |- | Print || Art made from a process involving printing normally on paper, usually for the purpose of creating prints that have an element of originality || WorkOnPaper |- | Scroll || Writing or painting on a roll of parchment or paper || WorkOnPaper |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Object/Artifact || Item made for use or model representing use, typically an item of cultural or historical interest || Collectible |- | Basket || A container used to hold or carry things, typically made from interwoven strips of plant materials or wire. || ObjectArtifact |- | Bark Basket || Item (basket) constructed primarily of stitched or folded bark || Basket |- | Coiled Basket || Item (basket) constructed with a continuous coil foundation bound together by stitching || Basket |- | Plaited Basket || Item (basket) constructed of warp and weft elements woven at right angles || Basket |- | Twined Basket || Item (basket) constructed of two or more weft elements interwoven between warp elements || Basket |- | Ceramic || Item made of clay and hardened through heat || ObjectArtifact |- | Coin || A small flat piece of metal or other material used primarily as a medium of exchange or legal tender. || ObjectArtifact |- | Manufactured Doll || Doll that was primarily commercially or mechanically manufactured || ObjectArtifact |- | Firearm || A small arms weapon, such as a rifle or pistol, from which a projectile is fired by gunpowder || ObjectArtifact |- | Furniture || Movable objects intended to support various human activities such as seating (e.g. chairs stools and sofas) eating (tables) and sleeping (e.g. beds) || ObjectArtifact |- | Glassware || An object or container made of glass. || ObjectArtifact |- | Jewelry || Decorative personal ornaments worn on clothing or the body that are often made from or contain jewels and precious metal || ObjectArtifact |- | Clothing/Dress/Costume || An item or a related assemblage of items meant to be worn || ObjectArtifact |- | Stamping Die || A special one-of-a-kind precision tool that cuts and forms sheet metal into a desired shape or profile || ObjectArtifact |- | Textile || An item of cloth or fabric manufactured through weaving knitting crocheting knotting or felting || ObjectArtifact |- | Woven Textile || Two distinct fiber threads interlaced at right angles on a loom to form a cloth || Textile |- | Crocheted Textile || Fabric is formed by interlocking yarn or thread with a hook typically one stitch at a time || Textile |- | Felted Textile || Fabric is formed by matting condensing and pressing fibers together || Textile |- | Knitted Textile || Fabric is formed by consecutive rows of interlocking loops of one or more yarns with a set of needles with multiple stitches open at a time || Textile |- | Hooked Textile || Art or craft where textiles are made by pulling loops of yarn or fabric through a stiff woven base to create a hooked rug or wall hanging || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile || Intentional entanglement of cord, braid, ribbon, beading, fabric, or other material that will create a new shape or structure by forming loops, intertwining, and weaving of the base fabric. || WovenTextile |- | Knotted Textile (Macrame) || Fabric is formed by knotting together fiber strands || Textile |- | Tufted Textile || Textiles made through a process of applying anchoring stitches to keep cushioning and upholstery fitting snuggly in place and secured to the frame of the piece || WovenTextile |- | Navajo Rug/Textile || A woven textile created by a Navajo on an upright Navajo loom || WovenTextile |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Archive || A single archival item or a body of historical records from a single source or created by a single entity || Collectible |- | Oral History || A record of historical information using sound recordings and/or transcripts of interviews with people having personal knowledge of past events || Archive |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Photograph || An image captured typically through the use of a camera (not always made with a camera) || Collectible |- | Motion Picture || Moving photography which encompasses film digital and analog formats of movies || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Publication || A published work- a book, pamphlet, map, piece of music, or other work for general use or viewing || Collectible |- | Book || A written or printed work consisting of pages glued or sewn together along one side and bound in covers || Publication |- | Map || A representation usually on a flat surface of an area of land or sea showing physical features, cities, roads, etc || Publication |- | Postcard || A card for mailing a short message without an envelope typically having a photograph or illustration on one side. || Publication |- | Sewing Pattern || Template for creating a garment or other sewn item || Publication |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Vehicle || An item used for transporting people or goods especially on land such as a car, truck, bicycle, or cart || Collectible |- | Motor Vehicle || An automobile, truck, bus, or similar motor-driven conveyance || Vehicle |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Zoology || The study and classification of animals || Collectible |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Botany || A plant or plant specimen || Entry |- ! style="padding: 10px;"| || || |- | Collectible || Any item suitable for collecting and sought by collectors || Entry |- | Entity || A thing with distinct and independent existence, such as a person, business, or organization || Entry |- | Moment || Entry for capturing images and notes about anything - events, everyday life, etc. || Entry |- | Basic Entry || Form for the most basic Entry || |} 49c923fae0354421e5649b579d4881c51e5ad746 0 9 435 391 2024-09-17T16:52:21Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. Also see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 8da550cee5d280db821fa86c740288b3fc2142e5 438 435 2024-09-17T20:32:42Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. 8773661fe0b9000b8efde181059c954216178968 6 66 445 2024-09-29T16:17:18Z Howard 1 CatalogIt API Reference and User Guide wikitext text/x-wiki == Summary == CatalogIt API Reference and User Guide 51be0f204b39a32c6c835bc159522db12e6ffbdb 0 67 458 2024-09-30T17:35:23Z Hunter 9 Created page with "<html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,PHN2ZyBmaWxsPSIjNTA1MDUwIiB4bWxucz0iaHR0cDovL3d3dy53My5vcmcvMjAwMC9zdmci..." wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> 17483916f6f3359b99b162c4458e7f37014f4a06 0 26 462 459 2024-10-02T14:22:01Z Hunter 9 /* What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 93142e742fb8573a01e3eab4cbf572ae85f7621a 464 462 2024-10-03T17:15:51Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. Soon, CatalogIt will be able to accept attachments of audio files as well. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 4704cdc9221ffaf5b580a15b0dd23ebeb2333501 472 464 2024-10-09T15:21:07Z Hunter 9 /* What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 6f7050833a5aac84b6ef54a441f3b670a39ce315 506 472 2024-11-12T18:13:02Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? == No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. e694a5fb24dd7bdc62b8ebf324193c773e0521e5 507 506 2024-11-12T18:17:09Z Hunter 9 /* Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Some of my images appear "fuzzy" == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 89a92cccc95a9083f4e04413ee9af35ffef9aa7c 0 3 463 460 2024-10-02T20:55:38Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Thanks to an exciting new update, Account Owners can now add users on their end! To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account here on our support site.] Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] b069e8c727e3ab76cdfc6c0930b73a2b5cf5e289 469 463 2024-10-08T18:23:00Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Adding_Users_to_your_Account here on our support site.] Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 1a3f817154a44836acfb1de36caa22a5a71d6f65 496 469 2024-10-15T13:03:26Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3a20306e5df0d2f7cc15585fd4a5b445a431d36a 504 496 2024-10-18T16:33:58Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, and to create an entry without a photo. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3772031579dfc3ebf5629aa37154b8debb7a8827 0 67 465 458 2024-10-03T20:43:27Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> '''== Storing you Collection ==''' The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. == Location == The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. == Shelving == Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. == Containers == When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. b6b95347f0536db3b4c802623a14361dd94811a8 466 465 2024-10-07T13:50:51Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Storing you Collection == The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. === Location === The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. === Shelving === Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. === Containers === When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. fe7e5dbab8115ad29bbfd9981c850a3456c7b868 467 466 2024-10-07T17:55:40Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Storing you Collection == The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. === Location === The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. === Shelving === Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. === Containers === When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. == Museum Centered CatalogIt Articles == === MasterIt Articles === === Blog Posts === 0cd5f34defd9814c5f5ecf31f1cff3a272439830 468 467 2024-10-08T15:40:33Z Hunter 9 /* MasterIt Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Storing you Collection == The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. === Location === The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. === Shelving === Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. === Containers === When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. == Museum Centered CatalogIt Articles == === MasterIt Articles === See our museum focused [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit MasterIt articles] to for tips and more ways to advance your organization. # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] # [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] === Blog Posts === 41a792608231c33ab170abc9af38cc9d7dfb03e9 470 468 2024-10-08T18:23:07Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] a8ac55c243cdcf2bfc09bb98dabead558572d825 471 470 2024-10-09T13:50:07Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 5709d37e262ab6e201bf2ab1a362937b2de492eb 473 471 2024-10-09T18:07:09Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 15a379506c5906f82332b3e5d6de27ff087348fc 474 473 2024-10-09T19:26:00Z Hunter 9 /* Collection Related Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] dea6944ed899b7ab373dd539a19dd40c46a07530 475 474 2024-10-09T19:27:30Z Hunter 9 /* Sharing and Web Publishing Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 4146c4b72f95a21570e3971b48e641788b8da083 476 475 2024-10-09T19:36:38Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Related Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] da1dff4a3f81d0a1cff44df852a3b98a5332d64a 477 476 2024-10-10T13:59:44Z Hunter 9 /* Related Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] e407a6f5c7f6863314604a7b234ac1acacfb6667 478 477 2024-10-10T14:04:14Z Hunter 9 /* Sharing and Web Publishing Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] dad637e9cf361494892c0c7f16d258a54bbd1f08 479 478 2024-10-10T14:54:39Z Hunter 9 /* Collection Related Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 7ae0b6152d1793d1ca96c85bd1222371126b7b1c 480 479 2024-10-10T14:57:20Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 82b2c6ee242290314d1df184f4876d81009a8d16 481 480 2024-10-10T14:59:57Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning.] === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 7b68fd3f439433e0597edebe25d341bd1957ccbd 482 481 2024-10-10T15:00:47Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] 8c915c14139aa5afad3fd25bebaa9f5c32a36eda 483 482 2024-10-10T15:01:10Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,PHN2ZyBmaWxsPSIjNTA1MDUwIiB4bWxucz0iaHR0cDovL3d3dy53My5vcmcvMjAwMC9zdmciIHZpZXdCb3g9IjAgMCAyNCAyNCIgaWQ9Im11c2V1bV9zdmciPjxwYXRoIGQ9Ik0zLjA4NiAxOC4xNzJjMC0uMTkuMTUzLS4zNDMuMzQzLS4zNDNIMjAuNTdjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3YyLjRjMCAuMTg5LS4xNTMuMzQyLS4zNDMuMzQySDMuNDNhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDN2LTIuNHpNMTEuODc3IDEuNTY2Yy4wOC0uMDMuMTY3LS4wMy4yNDYgMGw4LjU3MiAzLjI5N2MuMTMyLjA1LjIyLjE3OC4yMi4zMlY2LjY2YzAgLjE5LS4xNTQuMzQzLS4zNDQuMzQzSDMuNDNhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDNWNS4xODNjMC0uMTQyLjA4Ny0uMjcuMjItLjMybDguNTctMy4yOTd6TTQuMTE0IDguNTcyYzAtLjE5LjE1NC0uMzQzLjM0My0uMzQzSDYuNjRjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNGMwIC4xOS0uMTU0LjM0My0uMzQzLjM0M0g0LjQ1N2EuMzQzLjM0MyAwIDAxLS4zNDMtLjM0M1Y4LjU3MnpNOC40MTYgOC41NzJjMC0uMTkuMTUzLS4zNDMuMzQyLS4zNDNoMi4xODJjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNGMwIC4xOS0uMTUzLjM0My0uMzQzLjM0M0g4Ljc1OGEuMzQzLjM0MyAwIDAxLS4zNDItLjM0M1Y4LjU3MnpNMTIuNzE3IDguNTcyYzAtLjE5LjE1My0uMzQzLjM0My0uMzQzaDIuMTgyYy4xODkgMCAuMzQyLjE1My4zNDIuMzQzdjcuNzE0YzAgLjE5LS4xNTMuMzQzLS4zNDIuMzQzSDEzLjA2YS4zNDMuMzQzIDAgMDEtLjM0My0uMzQzVjguNTcyek0xNy4wMTggOC42MDNjMC0uMTkuMTU0LS4zNDMuMzQzLS4zNDNoMi4xODJjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTQuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNWMwIC4xODktLjE1NC4zNDItLjM0My4zNDJIMTcuMzZhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDJWOC42MDN6Ii8+PC9zdmc+' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] abfab118099627c8793cffb3043c1f5d2a7a4217 485 483 2024-10-10T16:04:05Z Hunter 9 /* Sharing and Web Publishing Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] == == * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] c569e2aef03cf07f703256be4b7fbc965759a78c 486 485 2024-10-10T16:07:46Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 3af1b5d99c61ad5ca6f9e88ff4e2878dab9a272e 487 486 2024-10-10T16:09:04Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 14ea5816f98dc1ce34d261931e44bfc8ceeb4192 488 487 2024-10-10T16:10:48Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition vs. Accession */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Collection Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 51c85137d39671af7cd7bfa0dd79f58b8a9fec10 489 488 2024-10-10T18:30:14Z Hunter 9 /* Collection Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Acquisition Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] fc5d13d141ff584f241749b5d9e8a4c8067518c6 490 489 2024-10-10T18:30:26Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Related Articles */ wikitext text/x-wiki <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 98bc46a373a4f9852cfbaf1aa75bf24ece41ba6d 491 490 2024-10-10T18:32:16Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki [[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 81a4876b42b2afb675adbd45585bb1937ae4171a 492 491 2024-10-10T18:34:22Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 1d5698bffb99f5417960a22b717aa87559e67543 493 492 2024-10-10T18:34:39Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Web Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 031407e8bbdb83e90ff6f9138c8791701e58767d 495 493 2024-10-10T20:00:39Z Hunter 9 /* Sharing and Web Publishing Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing you Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affects the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting you collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that has temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly, and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 8afcd31513da73dfc10cae49314dfe9183104775 505 495 2024-10-31T18:33:12Z Hunter 9 /* Storing your Collection */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 278f283a78ae002abf88453e927505328fad1ccf 0 16 484 461 2024-10-10T15:59:20Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). dfcb0993e9740cae204331af8d3fe31781ca57ab 494 484 2024-10-10T18:38:41Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Dating Structures For Data Importation== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use of of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). b59047e3649d40eb718034dbc0252f42783e0bb9 509 494 2024-12-04T21:11:22Z Dan 2 /* Dating Structures For Data Importation */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Date Structures For Data Import== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use one of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). 1e08b675556ddf80f5d50658fca6474d20e26363 0 9 497 438 2024-10-18T14:21:05Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} 1f7d961c5e6a6a5f1214d63181d6f9ff0260ef17 498 497 2024-10-18T14:21:53Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} 9bc97f1d2c9910c0e6d8edc7a4a679419e4e7a27 499 498 2024-10-18T14:22:20Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} d552e379532d6237c7587a1fff4bdaf847461073 500 499 2024-10-18T14:24:39Z Hunter 9 /* Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} e1fae40de24c369de5ac163979dc3845213428d8 501 500 2024-10-18T14:41:27Z Hunter 9 /* Bulk Operations in Catalogit */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} 88b667d5b094d2ad05bb92facbf289ea92464414 502 501 2024-10-18T14:41:52Z Hunter 9 /* Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} In this video, we explain how to delete a Profile. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} 5f8a240b3e024afe4d14cf0ed77bfe221b0e33b8 503 502 2024-10-18T14:42:13Z Hunter 9 /* Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw&t=2s }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} In this video, we explain how to delete a Profile. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} In this video we show you how to add, edit, and delete users in CatalogIt. 640a779b8c170a2e756866c16a554abfd5258d7d 508 503 2024-12-03T17:25:28Z Hunter 9 /* The Accession Process in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHRdqIng1kc&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=14 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your Entries. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} In this video, we explain how to delete a Profile. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} In this video we show you how to add, edit, and delete users in CatalogIt. 7b53d742279acaae3d8b77b7ee57e5051879a6c8 510 508 2024-12-04T21:22:48Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LqPqh9HPyk&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=15 }} In this video we demonstrate how you can easily generate Avery labels with your CatalogIt data and QR codes == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} In this video, we explain how to delete a Profile. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} In this video we show you how to add, edit, and delete users in CatalogIt. 5e72e5f20a6ed52cc27b87b822ae59908236a328 511 510 2024-12-04T21:23:14Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Avery Labels with CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ju912WkT9Ec&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=18 }} In this video, we explain how to delete a Profile. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} In this video we show you how to add, edit, and delete users in CatalogIt. 8daa6981c5432ae1e7825e7add8d177dcbff1e8b 0 9 512 511 2024-12-04T21:24:01Z Hunter 9 /* Deleting a Profile in CatalogIt */ wikitext text/x-wiki == Creating your First Entry in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eKNpDl6YwRQ }} This video demonstrates how to create your first entry in CatalogIt. == Creating an Entry with your Smartphone == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kQkpPSopJP4 }} == Editing an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buijCg1_Ag4 }} This video shows how to edit an entry in CatalogIt. == Photo Editing in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Eojh6kk_6N8 }} This video demonstrates the photo editing features of CatalogIt, including how to set your Thumbnail images. == Creating and Editing Folders == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/SlkkElLnMOU }} In this video, I describe how to create and edit folders in CatalogIt and how to add and remove Entries from your Folders. == Add, Move, & Delete Photos from an Entry == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iiK_SgPEhW0 }} In this video, I demonstrate how to add and manipulate images in your CatalogIt entry. == Create a Person Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kNs-Dk81D7M }} In this video, I'll demonstrate how to add a person profile to a CatalogIt entry. == Deleting a Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/Ju912WkT9Ec }} In this video, we demonstrate how to delete a profile. == Creating Hierarchical Locations == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/AuDsGkjCUsw }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create hierarchical locations for the items in your collections. == Bulk Operations in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/AuvBiEWB9vs }} In this video, I demonstrate how to perform bulk changes to a group of Entries in CatalogIt. == Adding Getty AAT Terms to your CatalogIt Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://youtu.be/FHRdqIng1kc }} In this video, I demonstrate how you can easily add Getty Art and Architecture Thesaurus terms to your CatalogIt Entries. == Printing Folders and Entries == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://https://youtu.be/snh3vRdEk8U }} In this video, I demonstrate the Print Features of CatalogIt. == Creating Avery Labels from your CatalogIt Data == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/0LqPqh9HPyk }} In this video, I demonstrate how to create Avery labels, including QR codes, from your CatalogIt data. For more on QR codes see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt]" and "[https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_How-To_Videos&action=edit&section=13 Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt.]" == The Accession Process in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 }} This video describes the Accession process, how to create an Accession Record, and how to tie CatalogIt Entries to the Accession Record. This video is intended for CatalogIt Museum account users. == Using the Museum Acquisition Profile == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/r-N9UK-FojY }} In this video, we demonstrate how to use the Acquisition Profile to document items that your institution has acquired but are not intended to be part of the permanent collection. == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gRG-yRyyTpQ&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=16 }} In this video, we describe how you can use the Category Profile in CatalogIt to create your own, custom, hierarchical categories within your collections. == Bulk Operations in Catalogit == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AuvBiEWB9vs&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=17 }} In this video, we explain how you can add, amend, or delete information from a group of entries at once. == Adding and Editing Users in CatalogIt == {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rk5kUNwfIlw&list=PLh1Akm1WtAXbAwMiyJEc_ASl5AQbzBbb9&index=19 }} In this video we show you how to add, edit, and delete users in CatalogIt. 8ca6cac8b01ce0999560c7894752d64d5094c3d2 0 26 513 507 2024-12-06T15:56:39Z Hunter 9 /* Some of my images appear "fuzzy" */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. c5a478045e5a7e9c0428c05e255fd0d8b044466c 514 513 2024-12-06T15:57:04Z Hunter 9 /* I can only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 5e4114ef09e751a03a5b775848d4b4c662d99e9e 515 514 2024-12-06T20:26:07Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == What are "Top Level Images"? == "Top Level Images" are any image attached to an Entry. == On the HUB, why is the item count different from the total I get when when counting up the entries in all of the folders? == This discrepancy is likely caused from having some items in multiple folders. The total item count displayed on the HUB is the amount of unique entries you have published to the web. Adding up the number of entries in each folder does not take into account any overlaps in entries between folders. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the response. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. e9ba781c073dfc8beb625e5db2dce32f708f53cd 518 515 2024-12-13T21:28:10Z Hunter 9 /* Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == What are "Top Level Images"? == "Top Level Images" are any image attached to an Entry. == On the HUB, why is the item count different from the total I get when when counting up the entries in all of the folders? == This discrepancy is likely caused from having some items in multiple folders. The total item count displayed on the HUB is the amount of unique entries you have published to the web. Adding up the number of entries in each folder does not take into account any overlaps in entries between folders. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the request. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. cd7a6bfb261d8f114804f6af62ad0c9fe15cfeff 521 518 2024-12-18T17:38:46Z Hunter 9 /* How many users can share a CatalogIt account? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices and account breakdowns and can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order that will be available, though that is further out on our roadmap. == What are "Top Level Images"? == "Top Level Images" are any image attached to an Entry. == On the HUB, why is the item count different from the total I get when when counting up the entries in all of the folders? == This discrepancy is likely caused from having some items in multiple folders. The total item count displayed on the HUB is the amount of unique entries you have published to the web. Adding up the number of entries in each folder does not take into account any overlaps in entries between folders. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the request. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 2fa8e0cdd79840c9328b8d27c82061824b0446a4 522 521 2024-12-18T17:39:48Z Hunter 9 /* Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices and account breakdowns and can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order, though that is further out on our roadmap. == What are "Top Level Images"? == "Top Level Images" are any image attached to an Entry. == On the HUB, why is the item count different from the total I get when when counting up the entries in all of the folders? == This discrepancy is likely caused from having some items in multiple folders. The total item count displayed on the HUB is the amount of unique entries you have published to the web. Adding up the number of entries in each folder does not take into account any overlaps in entries between folders. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the request. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. 7d0c021ce759b1b5eb6a658ea70b260ef610c677 523 522 2024-12-18T17:40:11Z Hunter 9 /* How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is a powerful, intuitive and scalable application for cataloging, managing and working with your collections, and selectively publishing them to the Web. == How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is secure? == It is our top priority to make the CatalogIt system secure and trusted. Our infrastructure runs in a VPN (virtual private network) behind a firewall fronted by load balancers that restrict traffic to a single port only. CatalogIt infrastructure runs on AWS (Amazon Web Services) and takes advantage of their monitoring tools (CloudWatch) to notify us of issues and keep tabs of memory, load, disc usage, etc. Traffic to our database servers, search engine, and worker processes can only originate from within the VPN (i.e. our database servers cannot be accessed outside the VPN -- e.g. from the public internet). All communication between client and server happens over secure HTTPS/TLS connections. We do not use cookies or store any personally identifiable information on your computer or mobile device. Authentication utilizes the oAuth2 protocol (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OAuth) which is used by Apple, Google, and other top-tier technology-dependent businesses to secure their data and transactions. CatalogIt stores the oAuth2 refresh and access tokens on the client’s devices; the client token expires every few minutes; the refresh-token can be revoked at any time. For added security, CatalogIt supports multi-factor authentication which adds an additional layer of security to your account by requiring an additional code to log in that is either sent to your mobile device via text message or generated by a third-party authenticator app such as Microsoft Authenticator, Google Authenticator, etc. == How does CatalogIt protect data from disasters? == CatalogIt’s infrastructure is run on Amazon Web Services, in a virtual private cloud. CatalogIt stores all data in two, geographically separated data centers. The primary center is in Eastern Oregon and the secondary center is in Virginia Storing data in two separate locations protects the stored data from natural disasters and technological failures. If anything happens that affects one facility, the other is there as a backup. This includes the possibility of bit-rot or digital decay. If it were to occur in one location, the probability of it happening in the other is statistically near zero. === How Durable is Amazon S3? === Amazon S3 provides the most durable storage in the cloud. Based on its unique architecture, S3 is designed to provide 99.999999999% (11 nines) data durability. Additionally, S3 stores data redundantly across a minimum of 3 Availability Zones (AZ) by default, providing built-in resilience against widespread disaster. Customers can store data in a single AZ to minimize storage cost or latency, in multiple AZs for resilience against the permanent loss of an entire data center, or in multiple AWS Regions to meet geographic resilience requirements. === How is Amazon S3 designed for 99.999999999% durability? === Amazon S3’s design for durability is a function of storage device failure rates and the rate at which S3 can detect failure, and then re-replicate data on those devices. S3 has end-to-end integrity checking on every object upload and verifies that all data is correctly and redundantly stored across multiple storage devices before it considers your upload to be successful. Once your data is stored in S3, S3 continuously monitors data durability over time with periodic integrity checks of all data at rest. S3 also actively monitors the redundancy of your data to help verify that your objects are able to tolerate the concurrent failure of multiple storage devices. == What browsers does CatalogIt support? == CatalogIt supports newer versions of Chrome, Edge, Firefox, and Safari on both desktop and mobile. If you are using Microsoft Edge please make sure you're using the latest version (44.18362.267.0) to avoid issues with date formatting. CatalogIt also has mobile native apps for iOS and Android- just download the CatalogIt App from the Apple App Store or from the Google Play Store and log in with your email and password. == Can CatalogIt be used offline? == As a cloud-based software, you do need to have internet access to use the program.  You can access your data and work in your records from anywhere that you do have internet access. == Is there a limit to the number or size of images that can be added to an Entry? == There is no limit- CatalogIt recognizes that there are many cases where multiple images can be particularly valuable for documenting an Entry. To ensure that the images you are uploading are compliant with imaging and digitization standards, check out our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines.] == What types of images or documents can CatalogIt handle? == Account users can currently attach JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF, RAW, Excel, Microsoft Word, PDF files and most video and audio formats to CatalogIt Entries and Profiles. == Can you edit the Watermark on the images uploaded to the HUB? == Currently, you can select the watermark text and the location the watermark will be displayed on your image. To make these changes go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, select the Media tab, then make changes under “Watermark.” The size that the Watermark displays depends on the amount of characters the Watermark contains (i.e. less letters = larger font; more letters = smaller font). == Can I migrate my existing collections data to CatalogIt? == Yes- we’ve successfully migrated accounts from the following collections management systems/inventory databases: * PastPerfect * Eloquent * EmbARK * FileMaker Pro * Koha * Spreadsheet Software (Excel, Numbers) * Microsoft Access * Microsoft Word == Can I import my images to CatalogIt?== Data migrations of image files can be accomplished. We may be able to import your images as well, depending on how they are stored in your system. As mentioned above, numerous images can be uploaded to each Entry record. == How much does CatalogIt cost?== Users can set up a free Museum, Personal, Organization, or Conservator Account with full functionality (with the exception of Web publishing) for up to 50 Entries. When your Account exceeds 50 Entries, you can subscribe and continue using the same account. Annual subscription prices can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing here on our website]. == How many users can share a CatalogIt account? == Accounts can have as many users as they need to manage their collection. Every Museum, Organization, and Conservator Account includes ten users; every Personal Account includes five users. Additional users can be added to any account to accommodate interns, volunteers, increased staffing or more family members. Prices and account breakdowns and can be found [https://www.catalogit.app/pricing on our website]. == Can users create custom fields? == A large part of the value CatalogIt brings to any collection is a rich set of accepted and authoritative classifications and structured, common field names which gives museums and collectors a universal language for identifying objects and recording their condition, characteristics, and value. Therefore, adding customized or differentiated data fields adds confusion and detracts from the value that CatalogIt offers. That said, the CatalogIt team is happy to take suggestions for new CatalogIt classifications and to enhance existing product features. == Does CatalogIt compress or otherwise alter the images I upload? == CatalogIt stores all original images in their original sizes and formats, with their original file names, making them available to you whenever and wherever you might need them. We like to think of CatalogIt as a mini/lightweight DAMs (Digital Asset Management system). CatalogIt enables you to aggregate all of the digital assets related to your collections in a single repository, safely and confidently. == Do images taken with the CatalogIt app take up space on my mobile device? == CatalogIt doesn't store images taken in the app on your mobile device. This is on purpose so we don't consume your memory. The downside of not storing the photos on you device is in the event the upload fails or you forget to click Save then you have to retake the photos; but the upside is we don't contribute a bunch of images to your camera roll. == How does CatalogIt Web publishing work? == Included with every CatalogIt Subscription is the ability to publish (selectively or comprehensively) to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB. To enable the HUB, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app. Users set up their publishing profile with their logo, photo or avatar, and a background image, as well as a description of their institution or collection, then select which CatalogIt Folders they’d like to publish, and which data fields they’d like to share with the public. With a few clicks of the mouse, hundreds or even thousands of Entries can be published and made available, and searchable, to the world. See our MasterIt article, [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access], to learn more about sharing your collection. With an additional subscription to the CatalogIt API, CatalogIt provides users with our API and iFrame integration or our WordPress plugin, enabling them to publish their collection directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. For a more comprehensive guide to Web Publishing, see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing:~:text=cannot%20generate%20reports.-,Web%20Publishing,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics] on the topic. ==How do I find an Entry’s UUID?== An Entry’s UUID can be obtained from its URL. It is everything after the last slash (but not including the slash). == Does the HUB track traffic? == Not yet, but this is a frequently requested addition. User metric tracking will be a feature of a future release of the HUB. == Is there a way to change the arrangement of Entries in the HUB? == There isn't yet a user interface for you to manage this, it defaults to a sort based on Name/Title, though we can enforce a different sort option on the HUB for you (some people have had success using the Other Number field for this). In future releases of the HUB, we are looking at implementing a click and drag sort order, though that is further out on our roadmap. == What are "Top Level Images"? == "Top Level Images" are any image attached to an Entry. == On the HUB, why is the item count different from the total I get when when counting up the entries in all of the folders? == This discrepancy is likely caused from having some items in multiple folders. The total item count displayed on the HUB is the amount of unique entries you have published to the web. Adding up the number of entries in each folder does not take into account any overlaps in entries between folders. == Who has access to my data? How does CatalogIt ensure that my data is private? == You have full and absolute control over your data. Only you and those you’ve authorized in your CatalogIt Account can view or edit your Account’s data. CatalogIt staff does not view or access any User or Account data without your express permission. == Can I export my data and images from CatalogIt? == Yes- you can easily export your data and your images at any time using the Export function in the Actions Menu. == What kind of permission settings does CatalogIt have? Can users set their own permissions? == CatalogIt currently has several permission levels- [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#:~:text=to%20the%20user.-,User%20Roles%20and%20Permissions,-%5Bedit%5DUser Roles and Permissions they can be found here]. Account Owners can change the access levels for their users or remove them if needed. To do this go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the corresponding edit pencil next to the User. There you will have the option to edit or remove the selected user. == How do I remove a user from our CatalogIt account? == To remove a user go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, Users, then click on the pencil next to the users access level and select Remove. You will be prompted to confirm the users removal by typing in "remove ''user.''" == Can multiple users share the same CatalogIt login? == For ''readonly'' logins it's fine for multiple users to share a single login, although it is best not to be using it concurrently. However, if the users are going to be making changes it's best if each user has their own login. First, you maintain a strict and unambiguous audit log of who made what changes and when. Secondly, when users change certain preference settings that can create conflicts with other users who are utilizing the same login credentials. == Can I change my email address associated with my CatalogIt account?== Yes, you can change your email by going to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Email. From there, input and confirm the new email address and click Change Email. == Where can I find the End User License Agreement? == At the time you create an account, you must agree to the terms of the End User Licence Agreement. You can find a copy of it [https://www.catalogit.app/eula here on our website]. == Why do some of my images appear "fuzzy"? == CatalogIt uses a few different image sizes in the app: 1) a very small and low-quality thumbnail, 2) a "small," medium-quality image used in the Entry view and edit screens, and 3) a "full" sized high-quality image for viewing (and zooming into) a single image.  CatalogIt uses these different images to minimize network bandwidth and to keep the app performant.  The small, medium-quality images may suffer from "fuzziness" produced as a result of resizing the image. When viewing an Entry, however, if you click on a single image to view it in the image viewer, it will appear clear. Rest assured that your original image is safe and the full, high-res version appears clean and crisp. This fuzziness only appears in Entry view and edit derivative image "previews." == Why can I only see the first page of the pdf I uploaded? == When you upload a multi-page pdf CatalogIt uses the first page as a preview or placeholder for the file. To view the entire file you simply need to download it to your computer or mobile device. To do this click on the preview image in the entry and then the "cloud" download icon that will appear in the top left corner. == Is it possible for users to host their own version of CatalogIt? == The CatalogIt platform is shared across all users (to clarify, NOT the data, just the platform), utilizing Amazon Web Services for our hosting and other cloud services, and there is currently no ability for users to host their own instance. This allows us to make updates, bug fixes, etc., that are immediately available to all users and importantly, allows us to keep the costs low by sharing this infrastructure. == Why am I getting a "Network Request Error?" == There are a couple of reasons that can cause this error. First is your network speed. You can test this by Googling "Network Speed Test" and execute one of the resulting tests. If your internet is working fine, check the amount of available storage on your computer's hard drive. Low storage space can cause network requests to fail because there is not sufficient space to process the request. == Does CatalogIt support multiple languages? == In CatalogIt you able to enter text in any language you have installed on your computer- and a single field can contain multiple languages. CatalogIt does not currently store values for multiple languages separately or allow you to change the language for the field labels or hint text, we do plan to support both of those features in the future. == How do I cancel my subscription? == You can cancel your subscription by logging in from your computer (not via your phone or other mobile device), clicking on the Main Menu, going to Settings, and then to Subscription. Click on the "trash can" icon next to the subscription. At the end of the period, your account will revert to read-only status. You can resume working in your account at any time by creating a new subscription. === Do my entries on CatalogIt get deleted if my subscription lapses or is canceled? === No. Your account will go into a read-mode, which means you will still be able to login and access your data, but you won’t be able to make any changes or additions. Your account will be waiting for you exactly how you left it if you choose to re-subscribe. == How much does a CatalogIt webinar cost? == Our webinars are free! Even guests that do not have an account can attend - all you need to do is register. == Can I play the video and audio files attached to my CatalogIt entries? == Yes and no. Currently, CatalogIt supports video playback in the app only, not on the HUB. Audio playback will be added in a future update. ba1914041a8a33059ddc73d7984058c4c21a6b9e 0 3 516 504 2024-12-09T16:12:51Z Hunter 9 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows your to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] c5f01d466ea98c913079de0417e4b580ed8d8832 517 516 2024-12-09T16:44:10Z Hunter 9 /* Web Publishing */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail Screen:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 7e8989e30988f477d4f04dd1e71d1ed47321d86f 524 517 2024-12-26T16:08:08Z Hunter 9 /* CatalogIt Concepts */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] fd06990daf6623acbe5ec78a9a5005c73b467bed 525 524 2024-12-26T16:08:27Z Hunter 9 /* Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail Screen */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6e5482a2285fbf129c91c648f5c61af6e970970c 526 525 2024-12-26T16:09:17Z Hunter 9 /* Editing an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail Screen” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 44a747025a2d1c6786ccf6ae130b1503e2623ea1 527 526 2024-12-26T16:09:35Z Hunter 9 /* What is CatalogIt? */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail screen and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 7d888faf7f8c776103158ce636be573ae3ddf274 528 527 2024-12-26T16:09:57Z Hunter 9 /* CatalogIt Concepts */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail screen”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 00a554c5be56604b39cc7728bda41a16d044a138 529 528 2024-12-26T16:10:15Z Hunter 9 /* Basic Navigation */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail screen, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 102d97cb33ff3ae65dafd67baa4f3b3ba28bccab 530 529 2024-12-26T16:10:52Z Hunter 9 /* Viewing Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 842e55167e48fdc44d212dcaa819ca6dfbf5c1f3 531 530 2024-12-26T16:11:14Z Hunter 9 /* Managing Photos and PDFs */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6d026d658a0f1105ead0f7981089fe50e4c1aa49 532 531 2024-12-26T16:11:27Z Hunter 9 /* To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 9ad65522ccd9c97c86b46584cce2b41fe11abe7f 533 532 2024-12-26T16:11:38Z Hunter 9 /* To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail screen to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] acf3a4659177029436638f6582d6b4f01b0f8f2e 534 533 2024-12-26T16:11:48Z Hunter 9 /* Deleting an Entry */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail screen. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] b329487c180342e1f3596f91bc0d282ba320f253 535 534 2024-12-26T16:12:05Z Hunter 9 /* To create a new Folder: */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] e2471bedcc6303057492a548452c0b1510c87430 536 535 2024-12-26T16:17:40Z Hunter 9 /* Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6db56113723190dd31fd8a13fbccd537f6a94771 537 536 2024-12-26T16:17:57Z Hunter 9 /* Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] a030ce34d595499ffe259dd380c63e0fc52ad8cb 538 537 2024-12-26T16:18:10Z Hunter 9 /* Creating a Subscription */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail screen. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 4acfd1fc3d7ab9f2ee9e37c0b9142f86c7da0d39 539 538 2024-12-26T16:18:33Z Hunter 9 /* Getting Help */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, email, and more. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 8058e6feb7f52021bb846f0821f090b7cf5443c3 540 539 2024-12-26T16:24:38Z Hunter 9 /* Viewing Entries */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an accession number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3109acfc0a4cd9a03f648502748dedbb48681cb9 541 540 2024-12-26T16:26:01Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] c9fd84ef00888dc398d1a08e2aa85c4857202911 542 541 2024-12-26T16:29:06Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2024 would be assigned the number 2024.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2024 would be 2024.1.1, then the second would be 2024.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our Museum Demo Series video [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_YCjqbiH1vw The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 078432fea6e9d12ebc774e4432fe8a9aab4e2f52 547 542 2025-01-07T19:10:44Z Hunter 9 /* Accessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2025 would be assigned the number 2025.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2025 would be 2025.1.1, then the second would be 2025.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our How-To Video[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot request that we add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 3c46905fd42bc012cb49b8219161a6e766665489 554 547 2025-01-15T17:27:51Z Hunter 9 /* User Roles and Permissions */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2025 would be assigned the number 2025.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2025 would be 2025.1.1, then the second would be 2025.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our How-To Video[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 6435cbbe5e87d52c3ace20ccda42b36342d0408f 555 554 2025-01-16T16:10:23Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2025 would be assigned the number 2025.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2025 would be 2025.1.1, then the second would be 2025.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our How-To Video[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “New Folder…”. * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Resending Temporary Password == If your new User forgot to reset their password after 14 days of being added to your Account you can resend temporary login credentials. To do thi go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left), Settings, Users, and click the Envelope icon next to the User's status. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 1a8ea1195021090840aef636dbb97519a475105c 556 555 2025-02-07T17:55:41Z AnnieGaston 11 /* To create a new Folder: */ wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2025 would be assigned the number 2025.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2025 would be 2025.1.1, then the second would be 2025.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our How-To Video[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Select "New..." and click "Folder". * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Resending Temporary Password == If your new User forgot to reset their password after 14 days of being added to your Account you can resend temporary login credentials. To do thi go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left), Settings, Users, and click the Envelope icon next to the User's status. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] 8e3781111f70c0fff0d1511e601f24658cd6ba1a 557 556 2025-02-10T17:10:28Z AnnieGaston 11 /Creating a new Folder Group wikitext text/x-wiki == What is CatalogIt? == CatalogIt is an application for documenting physical things, recording where they came from, who made them, where and when they were made, what they were made of, how they were made, what they were used for, who used them, and how they came to be yours- the stories of things. The record of each physical thing you document is an “Entry” in CatalogIt. An Entry is defined by the classification you choose for it (what is it? a basket? a textile? a painting?), the data you input about the Entry’s characteristics, and one or more photos and other types of informative or visual media. The Classification delivers a custom set of data entry fields including the properties and relationships appropriate for that particular type of item. Examples of CatalogIt Classifications are photograph, painting, sculpture, publication, basket, etc. Throughout the CatalogIt screens are special descriptive fields called Profiles. Profiles allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information- a controlled vocabulary- about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles also add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...," "Material...," or "Color..." As you create more Entries, you may wish to organize them into groups based on the type of item, workflow, locations, exhibits, etc. In CatalogIt, these organizational devices are called Folders and are displayed in the “Thumbnail View” described below. You can place an Entry in multiple Folders and make edits to it from within any Folder, saving these changes to the Entry in every Folder location. == CatalogIt Concepts == '''Thumbnail View:''' the primary CatalogIt screen which allows you to view and access the Entries in your current Folder. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button and the Create Entry button. '''Entry:''' each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, "Paiute Burden Basket", "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or "1959 Original Barbie". '''Folder:''' any assembly of Entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Items can be moved from one Folder to another, and can exist in as many Folders as you need them to be in. Folders are also the level of publishing to web. '''Primary Photo:''' the photo that appears in your thumbnail view and the first photo that appears when you view your Entry. '''Classification:''' the groups of characteristics used to catalog your items. Each classification in CatalogIt includes the properties and values which are pertinent to that specific classification. The Classification Chooser allows you to choose the appropriate classification as part of the process of creating and editing Entries. '''Profiles:''' the fields in CatalogIt that allow you to capture and maintain standardized and reusable information about a wide variety of things such as a person, place, material, or technique. Once you’ve created a Profile, for example, of a person or a company that made an item in your collection, that profile is available to you to use again anywhere in your account. Profiles additionally add depth and detail to your entries- they relate entries to one another by these things that they have in common. A Profile can even relate to another profile, such as a person that is related to another person, or people to a particular place. As you are creating or editing an Entry, the Profile fields are easy to identify, as they always have an ellipsis after the name, such as, "Artist...", "Material..." or "Color..." == Logging in to CatalogIt == To access the CatalogIt app from a Web browser (on your desktop or laptop computer), open your browser (CatalogIt supports Chrome, Safari, Firefox, or Edge) and go to https://catalogit.app. If you are accessing the app from an iOS mobile device (iPhone or iPad) or Android mobile device (smartphone or tablet) download the CatalogIt app from the App Store or from Google Play, then open it to begin using CatalogIt on your mobile device. Logging in to your CatalogIt account is simple: just enter your email address and your password. == Basic Navigation == [[File:Primary-orientation.png|frameless|300px|Primary orienation]] Upon logging in, you’ll be at your “thumbnail view”- as you create Entries they will appear here in a grid format, or if you wish, you can view them as a list. You can view and access the Entries in your current Folder from this screen. It is also where you access the Main Menu, the Actions Menu, the Search button, and the Create Entry button. {| |style="vertical-align:top;padding-right:16px;"|[[File:Menu.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Main Menu''', in the upper left corner, connects you to your Folders, allows you to create new Folders, connects you to your profiles, provides help and feedback functions and is where you access your Account settings. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Action.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Actions Menu''', in the upper right corner, allows you to edit the current Folder, print, create reports, create QR codes, import and export Folders, publish Folders to the HUB, and sort Entries. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Search.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Search''' button allows you to search across all of your Entries in the current Folder. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Create.png|frameless|24px]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The orange '''Create Entry''' button, in the lower right corner, initiates the process to create a new Entry. |- |style="vertical-align:top;"|[[File:Leaderboard.png|24px|frameless]] | |style="padding-bottom:16px;"|The '''Leaderboard''', located in the lower left corner of the thumbnail view, displays a count and/or total value of the items in your current Folder. You can customize and show/hide the Leaderboard by going to Edit Folder from the Action Menu. |} == Creating an Entry == Each physical item for which you are creating a record in CatalogIt constitutes an Entry; for example, a "Paiute Burden Basket", a "Walrus Ivory Spoon", or a "1959 Original Barbie" would each be an Entry populated with the item’s unique characteristics and history. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To Videos#Creating_your_First_Entry_in_CatalogIt|How to Create an Entry]]" video. * Read our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-essentials-creating-a-basic-catalogit-record Cataloging Essentials: Creating a Basic CatalogIt Record.]" To create an Entry: * Click the Create Entry button in the lower right corner. * Next, choose a photo. You can use a photo you’ve already taken or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature, you can take a new photo. Note that you can also create your Entry with a pdf, Microsoft Word or Excel file or with no image at all (you can always add images later). * Add a name/title to the Entry. If you wish, you may also add a description of the Entry in the field below the photo. When you are done, click "NEXT" in the upper right corner. * Choose the classification best suited for this Entry- the classification you select will determine the data field properties that will be available to describe this item. Many of the classifications have sub-classifications below them- you can choose the more general classification or a more specific sub-classification. Once you have chosen a classification, click “DONE” in the upper right corner. [[File:Classification Chooser.png|frameless]] * Continue to edit the Entry and proceed through the data entry fields as far as you want. Aside from the photo and the name/title, all information is optional so only enter as much additional information as you wish. * When you are done, click “CREATE” in the upper right corner. * You will return to the thumbnail view, with your new Entry displayed. * If you don’t have a photo available or time to take a photo you can create a “New Blank Entry” directly from the Actions Menu. This allows you to begin a new Entry without a photo- you can always add photos later. Cataloging new acquisitions is not always a straight-forward process. Many museums have backlogs of objects that need to be cataloged and objects that do not have any documentation related to its acquisition. To find some tips on managing this instances see our MasterIt articles "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging Your Collections Backlog]" and [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-found-in-collections-objects-with-catalogit Tracking "Found in Collections" Objects with CatalogIt.]" == Viewing Entries == To view an Entry from the thumbnail view, click on the image of the Entry you wish to view. This opens up the Entry viewer and allows you to see all of the fields where data has been entered. You can navigate to next or previous Entries by clicking on the arrows in the lower left and right corners or by swiping left or right on your smartphone or tablet. The Actions Menu in the upper right corner of the View Entry screen allows you to print, publicate, and create a QR code. You can return to the thumbnail view by clicking on the white arrow in the upper left side of the blue bar. == Editing an Entry == [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Editing_an_Entry]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Editing_an_Entry|How to Edit an Entry]]" video * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode [[File:Edit Entry.png|frameless]] * Scroll through the available fields and enter the data you wish. When you are finished, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Accessioning == Accessions are an object or group of objects (lot) acquired at the same time by the same source that is added to a museum's permanent collection. This object or lot is assigned a unique number called an Accession Number. '''Accession Numbers''': Most museums in the US follow a three-part numbering system with the first two parts referring to the Accession Number following a year and batch numbering pattern. For example, the first accession of the year 2025 would be assigned the number 2025.1. '''Object / Entry ID''': The third-part of the numbering system are sequential numbers assigned to each object from the lot. For example, the first object from the first accession of the year 2025 would be 2025.1.1, then the second would be 2025.1.2, and so on. '''Strict Accessioning''': This is a default setting in CatalogIt where Object / Entry IDs are automatically assigned to the next available number. If you are trying to use a numbering pattern aside from the default in CatalogIt, you will encounter an error. We understand that not every museum follows the three-part numbering system. If you have a different numbering system and want Strict Accessions turned off, reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can likely accommodate your system. '''Customized Numbering Patterns''': If you are using a different numbering convention, it must follow a regular pattern. The numbering patterns use the following building blocks: :Y - ''4 digit year'' :M{1,2} - ''month, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :D{1,2} - ''day, zeroed filled to number of specified digits'' :d or ddd - ''1 to 3 digit day of the year (1-365) (should be only 1 or 3 digits; 3 digits zero fills)'' :N+ - ''auto incrementing number, zeroed filled to number of specified digits (i.e. N or NNN or NNNNN => 1 or 001 or 0001)'' :a+ - ''auto incrementing lowercase string, a filled to number of specified digits'' :A+ - ''auto incrementing uppercase string, A filled to number of specified digits'' Letters can be prepended to any of the patterns, e.g. “L” for loans, “Q” for acquisitions, “FIC” for found in collection, or “D” for deaccessioned entries. We can also set specific patterns for a variety of numbering fields and enforce strict adherence to the patterns set for each specific numbering system. We can only set one pattern per numbering system, so if there are multiple patterns for accession numbers or loans, it is best to turn off the pattern enforcement. For further reading, checkout our resources on Accessiong. See our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections,] blog post [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Aqcuisition v. Accession, Support Resource], [https://www.catalogit.app/support-resources/museum-accession-process Museum Accession Process,] and our How-To Video[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BusmaS39YY0 The Accession Process in CatalogIt.] == Full-text Searching == From the search bar in All Entries or in any Folder you can perform either a full-text search or a structured search. See the next topic for a discussion of Structured Search When performing full-text searches, you can also add some structure to the query. Here are some helpful tips for executing more complex full-text searches: * Spaces are treated as an "and" function, so if you search for Margaret Jones, you'll get all results that include both Margaret AND Jones. * Use the vertical bar symbol, |, between words as an OR function, for example, if you are searching for everything that includes either a dog or a horse, your search would be dog | horse. * Use quotes around a string of words to find Entries that include that exact string. If you are looking for that blue glass jar, for example, type the phrase enclosed in quotes, like this, “blue glass” and your results will only include items that have the exact phrase “blue glass.” You can be as specific as you wish, for example, “blue glass jar" and if that exact phrase is used in an Entry, it will appear in the search results. * Use the + symbol between words to find Entries that include all of those words. If you type in blue+glass, your results will only include the entries that include the word blue AND the word glass. You can string together several words this way to narrow a search. * Combine quotes and the + symbol. A search for “blue jar”+tin will result in entries that include both the exact phrase “blue jar” as well as the word “tin.” You’ll find the blue glass jar with a tin lid. * Use the - symbol to exclude terms. A search within your "All Entries" of -wood would result in all of your Entries that did not include the word "wood." * Use the + and - symbols together. A search of basket + -willow will result in all of your baskets that did not include the term "willow." * Use the * symbol as a "wild card" suffix. A search of harris* will result in entries that include the name Harris, as well as Harrisville, Harrison, Harrisburg, etc., any other words that start with "Harris." '''NOTE:''' certain words are considered meaningless in the context of a full-text search. These are known as "stop words" (more details [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stop_word here]). The following words are considered "stop words" and will be ignored during full-text searches: a, an, and, are, as, at, be, but, by, for, if, in, into, is, it, no, not, of, on, or, such, that, the, their, then, there, these, they, this, to, was, will, with. == Structured Searching == To perform a structured search, click on the "+" symbol on the right side of the search bar, and begin compiling your search criteria. Clicking "Advanced" after selecting the first level of search enables you to add more criteria to your search. === Concepts === ==== Simple ==== A simple structured search expression consists of three parts: * Property * Operator * Value (optional) Executing a simple structured search will find all Entries that match the search criteria expressed via the property/operator/value combination. Different property types use different sets of operators (i.e. string vs. number) and most operators require a value (the "Missing" or "Has" operators do not require a value). ==== Compound (Advanced) ==== Compounds searches are simple searches that are joined by AND and OR logic to express more detailed and precise searches. You can make compound searches as arbitrarily complex as required but use caution when doing so because it quickly gets confusing and complicated. “All must match” is the label used for AND. “At least one must match” is the label used for OR. Click the “Advanced…” button on the Search Builder popup after you've entered your first level of searching to open the compound search builder and create compound searches. === Searching by Classification === You can search on Classification in two ways: * equals (i.e. exact) * is-kind-of Classifications in CatalogIt are hierarchical and form a tree. For example, many classifications are descendants of Object/Artifact and therefore are a “kind-of” Object/Artifact, such as Basket, Furniture, Firearm. The Art classification and its descendants are another robust hierarchy: Art, Painting, Work on Paper, Drawing, etc. ==== Equals ==== Searching using equals (=) will only match Entries that are classified as the exact Classification specified. For example, searching on Art will only find Entries classified as Art and will not match any descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes) like Painting or Work On Paper ==== Is Kind Of ==== The “Is Kind Of” operator will find all Entries that match the specified classification or one of its descendant classes (i.e. sub-classes). If you “Is Kind Of” search on Art it will find anything classified as Art, Painting, Work On Paper, Drawing, Sculpture, etc. === Searching Locations === Locations are repeating, hierarchical fields and have the concept of current (or most recent). The Location field maintains a history of the different places an object has been and the dates. If more than one Location exists, the “current” Location is the one with the most recent date. When displayed, Locations are sorted by date so the current Location will always appear first. Locations are also hierarchical and searching will semantically honor the hierarchy. For example, if an Entry is located in “Shelf #1” and “Shelf #1” is located in “East Gallery”, then searching on either “Shelf #1” or “East Gallery” will find the Entry. You can search locations in two ways: * current ("is currently in") * equals (“has ever been in”) ==== Currently In ==== Use the “currently equals” operator to find all Entries that are currently in the specified location either directly or via a direct or indirect parent relationship (i.e. hierarchically) ==== Has Been In ==== Use the “equals” operator to find anything that has ever been in the location — i.e. it has a location in its history that matches the specified location. === Has or Missing Value === With structured search, you can easily find all Entries that are missing a value for a specific property. ==== Missing ==== For example, let’s say it’s important that all Entries have a “Date Made.” To find all properties that don’t have a “Date Made” use the “Missing” operator. ==== Has ==== In contrast, to find all Entries that have a “Date Made” use the “Has” operator. If having a value for a property is only important for specific kinds of classifications then create a compound (Advanced…) search and include the Classification in the expression. === No Media === To find all Entries that are missing some kind of media attached (i.e. have no image, PDF, etc) then search on “Media Count = 0”. The “Media Count” property is near the bottom of the list below the update/create properties. === Not in Folder === To find all Entries that have not been assigned to a Folder (i.e. are only in All Entries) then search on “Folder Count = 0”. The “Folder Count” property is near the bottom of the Property list below the update/create properties. == Managing Photos and PDFs == You can easily add, delete and move the photos and pdf files within your Entry. [[File:Video-Help.svg|20px|frameless|link=How-To Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt]] Watch our "[[How-To_Videos#Photo_Editing_in_CatalogIt|Photo Editing in CatalogIt]]" video === To add a new photo: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the camera icon in the lower right corner. You can select a pdf file, a photo or even multiple photos you’ve already taken, or if you're using a smartphone or tablet with a camera feature you can take a new photo. [[File:Add Photo.png|frameless]] * If are taking a photo with your smartphone or tablet, you will be given the option to use the photo you took or to retake it. Once you’ve selected or taken a photo, you may add a title to the photo in the field above the photo and/or a description in the field below it, for example, “Top View” or “Artist’s Signature.” * You can then continue to edit the Entry or click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To move photos and pdf files in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to move and click on the image. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Move Photos.png|frameless]] The icon of an up arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the top, the primary position. The icon of a down arrow pointing to a horizontal line will move the photo/pdf to the last position, and the other arrows will move the photo/pdf either up one or down one position. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. === To delete a photo or pdf in an Entry: === * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Scroll down to the photo or pdf you wish to delete and click on the image to select it for further action. This will open a blue bar with icons representing your action options. [[File:Delete Photo.png|frameless]] Click the trash can icon to delete the photo or pdf. When you are done, click “SAVE” in the upper right corner. == Deleting an Entry == * Click on the Entry from your thumbnail view to view the Entry. * Click on the pencil icon in the upper right corner to enter “edit” mode. * Click on the trash can icon in the lower left corner. You will be asked if you are sure you wish to delete the Entry- note that once it is deleted, it cannot be retrieved. If you wish to delete it, click “DELETE”. [[File:Delete Entry.png|frameless]] == Creating a New Folder == A Folder is any assembly of entries you wish to group together. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. A Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch," or they can relate to processes, such as “To be Cataloged.” Entries can be in multiple Folders at the same time. Publishing to the web in CatalogIt is also by Folder, so keep in mind things you may want to eventually display as groups and create Folders for them. === To create a new Folder: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Select "New..." and click "Folder". * Enter a name for your new Folder. * Add an optional description for your Folder. If you are publishing to the Web, this description will appear on the website. * “Leaderboard Visible” is turned on by default. The Leaderboard keeps a count and a sum of the value of the Entries in your Folder in the lower left corner of your thumbnail view. You can turn On or Off either of these two Leaderboard variables by checking or unchecking the box beside the variable name, or you can hide the Leaderboard entirely by clicking on the toggle switch next to the “Leaderboard Visible” label. * When you are finished, click “Create” in the upper right corner. === To add Entries to a Folder: === * Select an Entry that you'd like to add to the Folder * Click on the Edit pencil in the upper right corner to enter Edit mode * Click on the Folders icon in the upper right * Select the Folder(s) you'd like your Entry to appear in. * Click Save in the upper right corner. == Creating a New Folder Group == A Folder Group is a group of Folders. Folder Groups enable you to organize Folders that you'd like to associate together. Let's say you are planning an exhibition on music: you'd like to have a section about jazz, a section about blues, and a section about Motown. You can start by creating separate Folders for each section, and adding entries to their corresponding section Folders. Then, you can group those separate Folders within a Folder Group for your music exhibition! This way, you are keeping your exhibition sections separate while associating them together. Users with Owner or Admin level access can create Folder Groups. At this time, Folder Groups cannot be placed within other Folder Groups. Folders within Folder Groups can be published to the HUB, but Folder Groups themselves cannot be published. If you would like everything in a Folder Group to be published, you would need to publish each Folder separately. === To create a New Folder Group: === * Click on the Main Menu in the upper-left corner of the thumbnail view. * Select "New..." and click "Folder Group". * Enter a name for your new Folder Group. * Click "Create" in the upper-right corner. * Your Folder Group will now appear in the Main Menu. === To add a Folder to a Folder Group: === * Click on the Folder you would like to add to a Folder Group. * Click on the three dots in the upper-right corner and select "Edit Folder". * Select the drop-down menu under Folder Group and select the chosen Folder Group. You cannot create a new Folder Group in this section. * Click "Save" in the upper-right corner. * Your Folder will now appear nested underneath your Folder Group. === To remove a Folder from a Folder Group: === * Click on the Folder you would like to remove from the Folder Group. * Click on the three dots in the upper-right corner and select "Edit Folder". * Select the drop-down menu under Folder Group and select None. You can also choose to move it to another Folder Group, but you cannot create a new Folder Group in this section. * Click "Save" in the upper-right corner. == Hide or Show the Leaderboard (which presents count and/or value) on the Thumbnail View == * From your All Entries (or any other Folder), click on the "Actions Menu", the three dots in the upper right corner. * Select "Edit Folder" The lower part of this screen includes the items that can be shown or hidden on the "Leaderboard", that blue bar. You can make the whole Leaderboard hidden by clicking on the blue dot or you can show or hide the Count and/or Value. == Customize Date, Currency and Measurement Settings == CatalogIt defaults to US settings for currency, date format, length, and weight units, but the Account Owner can set custom defaults. To change your default settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings." * Next, select "Default Settings." * Choose your new default settings. Your currency will automatically display based on your selection and new dimensions and weights you enter will default to your selected setting. Units of measurement or currencies you’ve already entered will not change and going forward, you have the freedom to enter measurement data in units other than your default settings. CatalogIt will also automatically honor your local settings, so dates will display in the format customary for your country. == Email, Password, Account Name and Other Settings == To change your account settings: * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Settings.” * Choose the Setting you would like to change and follow the prompts on the next screen. == Creating a Subscription == If you've exceeded 50 Entries, it's time to subscribe! To subscribe, you'll need to be at your computer (this is one function in CatalogIt that isn't available from a mobile device). Follow these steps: * Log in from your desktop or laptop computer. * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose "Settings" * Choose "Subscription" == Adding Users to your Account == With CatalogIt, multiple users can view and edit the same account at the same time to collaborate on the Entries and Profiles. Only users with Owner level access can add, edit, or remove users. To do so go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do right below. Your new user will then be sent a temporary password that they will need to change before it expires in 14 days. == User Roles and Permissions == Different roles provide users with varied access levels in your Account. The current available roles are: * Owner: Can do everything. Can manage account-level settings: subscription, default settings, and name, and can request that we add or remove users. * Admin: Can do everything an Owner can do but cannot add or remove users, cannot change user access levels, and cannot manage the account's subscription. * Read-Write: Can add/update/delete single Entries. Can add, update, delete, and replace Profiles. For bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. replace or delete). Cannot manage account-level settings or web publishing settings. * Editor: Can create and edit Entries and Profiles but cannot delete them. For Bulk operations, can add only, cannot update (i.e. cannot replace or delete existing data). Cannot publish new or existing Entries to the web (i.e. cannot make a non-shared Entry public, cannot create a new Entry in a published Folder, cannot move an existing Entry into a published Folder). Cannot export data from the account. * Docent: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Can download images and other attached files. Cannot export data from the account. * Read-Only: Can view all records but cannot edit or delete them. Cannot download images or other media files, and cannot generate reports. == Resending Temporary Password == If your new User forgot to reset their password after 14 days of being added to your Account you can resend temporary login credentials. To do thi go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left), Settings, Users, and click the Envelope icon next to the User's status. == Web Publishing == CatalogIt has several features that allow you to share your collection with anyone that has an internet collection. The HUB allows you to publish to the [https://hub.catalogit.app CatalogIt HUB] while our API subscription allows you to publish directly to your own website. '''The HUB''' For a detailed walkthrough of this process, see our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2GWthBITKFA Museum Demo Series on the topic.] The HUB needs to be enabled on our end, so whenever you are ready to use it, just reach out to us at support@catalogit.app and we can set it up for you. Next, go to your Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Setting, then Account Profile. From there, fill out your Account Name, Description, Location, Website URL, upload an image or logo, and a background image. Once that is all done, press Save in the top right corner. Then go to the Main Menu, and Web Publishing Setting. These three tabs, Account, Entry, and Media, are the settings for controlling what is included on your HUB. This allows you to choose exactly what will be shared on your HUB. This is also where you can toggle your Web Publishing switch on and off as needed. Entries are published on the [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php?title=CatalogIt_Quick_Tips&mobileaction=toggle_view_desktop#Using_Folders.2C_Collections.2C_Categories.2C_and_Tags folder level.] After you select or [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SlkkElLnMOU create a folder,] open the folder you want to publish, go to the Actions Menu (three dots in the top right corner), and select Publish Folder. For more information on using Web Publishing to expand your collections reach, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access.] '''API Integration''' CatalogIt API provides users with our '''API''' and '''iFrame integration''' or our '''WordPress plugin''', enabling them to publish directly to their own public website, seamlessly and attractively. * To add API to your subscription, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, and then Subscriptions. Our Web Publishing Guides can be found below: [[Media:PUBLIC_API.pdf|CatalogIt Public API Reference Guide]] [[Media:CatalogIt iframe Integration Guide.pdf|iFrame Integration Guide]] [[Media:WordPress Plugin Installation Guide.pdf|WordPress Plugin Installation Guide]] == Getting Help == Getting help with CatalogIt is easy! * Click on the Main Menu in the upper left corner of the thumbnail view. * Choose “Help” and select the topic you need assistance with. If you don’t see the topic you need help with, please feel free to contact us at [https://www.catalogit.app/support CatalogIt Support] e3046865c15275e44bda94a653158a798a98dc5d 6 68 519 2024-12-16T14:09:44Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 6 69 520 2024-12-16T14:11:54Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki da39a3ee5e6b4b0d3255bfef95601890afd80709 0 16 543 509 2024-12-26T19:23:25Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Tags */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process- take a look! {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Date Structures For Data Import== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use one of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). eb6629b18c14e9f927c1d0cd59634abf5840b5a9 544 543 2024-12-26T20:43:52Z Hunter 9 /* Using the Hierarchical Category Profile */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process: {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places- take a look! [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Date Structures For Data Import== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use one of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). f22252e460b88e5186970edfd7cc6c7a541530dd 545 544 2024-12-26T20:44:16Z Hunter 9 /* Creating Hierarchical Places */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process: {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places: [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Date Structures For Data Import== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use one of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). e0f3c469144bdb93d14ed4d38c8d2f60c942d7c1 546 545 2024-12-26T20:48:18Z Hunter 9 /* Adding Users to your Account */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Museum_Tips | CatalogIt Museum Tips]] == Using the Search Function == See the CatalogIt Basics section for the type of search desired * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Full-text_Searching|Full Text Searching]] * [[CatalogIt_Basics#Structured_Searching|Structured Searching]] == Using Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags == We are frequently asked about the difference between these and how they should be used. There is lots of flexibility in how Folders, Collections, Categories, and Tags can be used. There is no right or wrong way to use them, but the following outlines how we think about using them and things to consider when using each. === Folders === Folders are any assembly of Entries you wish to group together into the "thumbnail grid" format. They are immediately accessible groups of Entries- right from your Main Menu. Items in a Folder do not need to be of the same classification. The Folder can be specific, for instance, "Paiute Twined Baskets" or general, such as "Things in Grandma's Hutch." Entries can be moved from one Folder to another and can exist in as many Folders as needed. Folders are also the level at which you'll be publishing to the web when you are ready for that, so if you think you'd want to publish a group of items by a particular artist to the web as a group, you'll want to keep them in a Folder. Folders are great for workflow-type projects- if you think you'll be generating reports or working with a group of Entries over time (creating an exhibit, loan, etc.) it can be handy to keep them organized in a Folder. If you anticipate needing to create multiple or regular reports on a group of items, placing them in a Folder makes that process easier. Folders can easily be deleted when the grouping is no longer needed. Some common uses for Folders include: * Web publishing - Entries organized into distinct themes * Grouping Entries to assign a project to a specific staff member or volunteer * Exhibition/Loan Management * Grouping a set of Entries together for a researcher === Collection Profile === The “Collection” Profile, which is available in CatalogIt Museum and Organization accounts, is a repeating field that allows you to separate your overall collections into distinct groups that you create and assign. The Collection Profile enables you to easily associate a group of Entries by that term. For example, you may have a named collection within your permanent collections called “Jane Smith Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” These same items may also be in your overall “Craft and Decorative Art Collection.” CatalogIt allows you to associate an entry with multiple collections to ensure you are identifying your collections as specifically as required. Your named Collections are easily searchable by that specific term. Examples: * Named collections, such as, "The Danielson Basket Collection" or the "Rodriguez Family Collection" * General collections used by a specific institution eg: “Crafts and Decorative Art Collection,” “Egyptian Textile Collection,” or "Education Collection" === Category Profile === The “Category” Profile field, included in all account types, enables you to classify your collection into hierarchical categories and subcategories that you define. An example of how the hierarchical Category profile might be used would be to create a Category of "Paintings" with a subcategory of Portraits, and subcategories of Portraits such as Couples, Women, Men, Children, etc. You can create hierarchical Category Profiles to as deep of levels as you need to ensure your collections are organized and categorized in ways that are of most use to you. Your named Categories are easily searchable at any level of your hierarchy. Learn more about creating and using the Category Profile [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Quick_Tips#Using_the_Hierarchical_Category_Profile here]. === Tags === Tags are a special class of Profile that can be thought of as "post-it" notes which you can attach to your Entries- they are particularly handy for quick task assignments. Some useful tags might be, "Needs more photos" or "Needs dimensions." They exist in the upper right corner of your Entries, so they are "outside" of the rest of the data pertaining to the Entry. Tags are easily searchable by the specific tag name. == Creating Tags == To create a Tag while editing or creating an Entry, follow these steps: * click on the "tags..." icon in the upper right corner * click the + button in the Edit Tags popup screen * give your Tag a name and if you wish, a description * click Create Once you've created your Tags they will be available to you when you are creating or editing your Entries. This soundless video demonstrates the process of creating a Tag. [[File:Create-tag.mp4|600px]] == Creating a Report from Profiles == Generating reports from your Profiles, such as a list of all of your records related to a particular Person or a Location, can be very handy. Reports can be useful for sharing information with people like staff, volunteers, researchers, the community, etc. Creating reports is easy to do. Here's how: * From your Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the particular type of Profile (Person, Location, etc.) * Select the specific Profile record you are looking for * Click on the three dots in the upper right (the Actions Menu) and select Usage Report From there, you can select the specific fields you'd like to appear on your report. For more information on this process see our MasterIt article, "[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports.]" == Editing a Profile== You may find that a Profile you've used has a typo or that you'd like to add additional information to it. It is easy to edit a Profile. Here's how: * From the Main Menu, select "Profiles" * Using either the "Frequently Used" icons or the search bar, navigate to the type of Profile you'd like to edit (a Person, Place, etc.) * Search for the record you'd like to edit and select it * Click the edit pencil in the upper right corner and make any changes you'd like * Click "Save" Here's a quick video that shows the entire process (note: this video does not have sound): [[File:Editing-a-profile.mp4|600px|Editing a Profile record]] == De-duplicating and Consolidating Profiles == It is very common to have multiple Profiles (i.e Person or Place) that represent the same entity but have different spellings and need to be consolidated into a single representation. The "Replace" feature is designed to de-duplicate and consolidate multiple Profiles into a single Profile. From the appropriate Profile list page: * click and view the Profile you want to eliminate * select ''Replace'' from the "Actions" menu * find and select the replacement Profile and click Replace * edit and delete the unwanted Profile Here's a quick, soundless video that shows the entire process: [[File:Profile Replace.mp4|600px|Replacing Profiles]] == Changing a Person Profile to an Organization Profile and Vice Versa == You may find that an Organization Profile was incorrectly created as a Person or vice versa. It is easy to fix that! Here's how: * Click on your Main Menu and navigate to Profiles * Search for "Person or Organization" (this is the parent Profile of the Person and Organization Profiles) * From within "Person or Organization" you can search for any Person or Organization Profile- search for the Profile you'd like to change * Select the Profile and click the Edit pencil * At the top of the Edit page you'll see a drop-down menu- click on it and you'll see that you can change the type * Be sure to click "Save" in the upper right corner when you are done Here's a brief video showing the process (Note- this video has no sound): [[File:Change-person-to-business.mp4|600px|Change a Person Profile to a Business Profile]] == Downloading your Original Image == CatalogIt stores your images for you in their original format, unaltered. You can download them to any device by following these steps: * Select the Entry to which the image is attached * Click on the image you would like to download * Click the "Download" icon in the upper left corner Here's a quick, soundless video- take a look! [[File:Download Image.mp4|600px|Download an Image]] == Using the Hierarchical Category Profile == You can use the Category profile to create your own, customized hierarchical categories within your collections. Here's how: * While editing or creating an Entry, at the "Category..." property, click the "+" button at the right * Give your new Category a name, and if you wish, a description and even "also known as" * Attach it as a "Subcategory of..." a "parent" Category you'd previously created, or create the new Parent category * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a short video demonstrating the process: {{#evt: service=youtube |id=https://youtu.be/gRG-yRyyTpQ }} == Creating Hierarchical Places == CatalogIt enables you to capture and display places hierarchically, for example, a town, in a state, in a country, and in a continent. Creating the hierarchy is simple- just follow these steps: * While editing or creating an Entry, at a "Place..." field (place made, place published, related place, etc.) type in the name of your place * If it doesn't already exist in your list, select "Create" * CatalogIt will prepopulate the name of your new Place from your search. * In the "Place Type..." field, select the appropriate type of Place (city, state, country, etc.) * In the "Located In..." field, select the appropriate place of which your new place is a part; for example, the country a state or province is located in. * Click "Create" in the upper right-hand corner. Here's a quick, soundless video showing how to create hierarchical places: [[File:Hierarchical Places.mp4|600px]] == Duplicating Entries == Do you sometimes find yourself documenting several nearly identical things, or even cataloging an item that is nearly identical to something you or a colleague had documented earlier? CatalogIt has a neat feature that can save you time and effort. Here's how to use it: * Find the Entry that has already been recorded * From the Entry view mode (not in “Edit”), click on the Actions menu (the three dots in the upper right) * Select “Duplicate” This generates a new Entry that is nearly identical to the first one- you’ll need to give the new Entry a name and add its own images and condition assessment. If your account has auto-numbering enabled (either Accession numbering and/or Entry/Object ID numbering), CatalogIt will auto-assign the next number for this new Entry. For more on the accession process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections.] == Adding Additional Users to your Account == CatalogIt Personal Accounts include up to three users; Museum, Organization, and Conservator Accounts include 10 users. To add users up to the amount included in your Account, you will need to be an Account Owner and go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Settings, then Users, click the Add User button, then enter the new users email and choose an Access Type. You can find a list of the available access levels with descriptions of what each can do here on our support site. Your new user will then receive an email containing a temporary password that will expire in 14 days. If you have already subscribed and would like to add users, here's how: * Log in to your CatalogIt account from a computer (this function is not available on mobile) * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Select "Subscription" * Select "Add Subscription" (you are adding a subscription for your additional users) * Check "Additional Users" * Add the number of additional users you would like. Here you can select whether you'd like to pay for them monthly or annually. * Click Next and complete the credit card information. Here's a brief video showing how to add users (beyond the users included) to your existing subscription. [[File:Subscription-add-users.mp4|Adding Users to your Subscription|600px]] == Reducing or Compressing the Size of a PDF File == Sometimes a report generated from CatalogIt that includes images which is then printed to PDF results in a very large file- these can be difficult to email or otherwise share. Adobe Acrobat offers a free, easy-to-use tool for compressing large files [https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/online/compress-pdf.html here on their website]. == Process Templates == [[:Media:Sample_Gift_Agreement.doc|Download Sample Gift Agreement]] == Changing the name of your Account == CatalogIt defaults to naming an account with the email address of the user that created it. Giving your Account an "official" name is important if you want to invite others to collaborate in it, so they aren't accessing an account named with your email address. Additionally, if you will be publishing your account to the Web via the CatalogIt HUB, your Account name will be the title of your HUB page. The Account Owner (the person who created the Account) has the ability to change the name. Here's how: * Log in to your account * Click on the Main Menu (the three bars in the upper left) * Scroll down to "Settings" * Click on "Account Profile" under Account Settings * Enter the name you would like your account to have in the Account Name field * Click "Save." Note: changing the Account Name won't affect your login credentials. == Date Structures For Data Import== When you are importing data into CatalogIt, use one of the two dating structures we recognize - Strict dates and Fuzzy dates. Choosing one of these will help avoid potential errors during the importation process. * Strict dates must be structured as an exact date (i.e. YYYY-MM-DD). * Fuzzy dates can be expressed in varying or imprecise ways (i.e. Year, or Year/Month, or Year/Month/Day). d392f80fe3411417131f3f019772718fa84ea2af 0 67 548 505 2025-01-09T19:16:28Z Hunter 9 wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 3257d9e3041369b7d53b3ca89426f45763139394 549 548 2025-01-14T18:43:31Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,PHN2ZyBmaWxsPSIjNTA1MDUwIiB4bWxucz0iaHR0cDovL3d3dy53My5vcmcvMjAwMC9zdmciIHZpZXdCb3g9IjAgMCAyNCAyNCIgaWQ9Im11c2V1bV9zdmciPjxwYXRoIGQ9Ik0zLjA4NiAxOC4xNzJjMC0uMTkuMTUzLS4zNDMuMzQzLS4zNDNIMjAuNTdjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3YyLjRjMCAuMTg5LS4xNTMuMzQyLS4zNDMuMzQySDMuNDNhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDN2LTIuNHpNMTEuODc3IDEuNTY2Yy4wOC0uMDMuMTY3LS4wMy4yNDYgMGw4LjU3MiAzLjI5N2MuMTMyLjA1LjIyLjE3OC4yMi4zMlY2LjY2YzAgLjE5LS4xNTQuMzQzLS4zNDQuMzQzSDMuNDNhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDNWNS4xODNjMC0uMTQyLjA4Ny0uMjcuMjItLjMybDguNTctMy4yOTd6TTQuMTE0IDguNTcyYzAtLjE5LjE1NC0uMzQzLjM0My0uMzQzSDYuNjRjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNGMwIC4xOS0uMTU0LjM0My0uMzQzLjM0M0g0LjQ1N2EuMzQzLjM0MyAwIDAxLS4zNDMtLjM0M1Y4LjU3MnpNOC40MTYgOC41NzJjMC0uMTkuMTUzLS4zNDMuMzQyLS4zNDNoMi4xODJjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTMuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNGMwIC4xOS0uMTUzLjM0My0uMzQzLjM0M0g4Ljc1OGEuMzQzLjM0MyAwIDAxLS4zNDItLjM0M1Y4LjU3MnpNMTIuNzE3IDguNTcyYzAtLjE5LjE1My0uMzQzLjM0My0uMzQzaDIuMTgyYy4xODkgMCAuMzQyLjE1My4zNDIuMzQzdjcuNzE0YzAgLjE5LS4xNTMuMzQzLS4zNDIuMzQzSDEzLjA2YS4zNDMuMzQzIDAgMDEtLjM0My0uMzQzVjguNTcyek0xNy4wMTggOC42MDNjMC0uMTkuMTU0LS4zNDMuMzQzLS4zNDNoMi4xODJjLjE5IDAgLjM0My4xNTQuMzQzLjM0M3Y3LjcxNWMwIC4xODktLjE1NC4zNDItLjM0My4zNDJIMTcuMzZhLjM0My4zNDMgMCAwMS0uMzQzLS4zNDJWOC42MDN6Ii8+PC9zdmc+' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. === Provenance === Provenance is a record of ownership for an object, used as a guide to authenticity and quality. Recording provenance of an object is crucial in proving that an object was acquired legally and ethically. CatalogIt allows museums and other collecting organizations to accurately track the legal ownership of the objects in their collection by utilizing the Provenance Profile. For a detailed description on documenting Provenance in CatalogIt, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection#:~:text=Using%20the%20%22Provenance%22%20profile%2C,directly%20to%20the%20object%20record.&text=The%20%E2%80%9CProvenance%E2%80%9D%20expansion%20panel%20is,the%20object%20or%20updated%20later. Recording Provenance for Your Collection.] === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] d9c39e459fbc36548fd7c4061a85b23382c5cafc 550 549 2025-01-14T19:02:52Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition vs. Accession */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. ==== Deaccessioning ==== '''Deaccessioning''' is the permanent removal of an object or objects from a museum's collection. Deaccessioning objects can be seen as a controversial act, so the processes should not be taken lightly. There are many reasons why a museum may choose to remove an object from their collection including, but not limited to: * Bulleted list item Condition: The object has deteriorated past the point of restoration. * Bulleted list item Safety: The condition of the object poses a threat to the health and safety of staff and visitors. * Bulleted list item Legality: The object was acquired unethically or illegally. * Bulleted list item Repatriation: The object was returned via Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA). * Bulleted list item Storage and Care: The museum does not have the staff, space, or financial means to properly take care of an object. * Bulleted list item Relevance and Mission: The object no longer meets the requirements for collecting outlined in a museum's collection policy. Or, the object no longer fits the mission of the museum. For more information about this process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections#:~:text=Using%20CatalogIt%20to%20Process%20and%20Manage%20Deaccessions&text=From%20within%20the%20Accession%20Profile,clarify%20which%20item%20was%20deaccessioned. Deaccessioning Museum Collections.] === Provenance === Provenance is a record of ownership for an object, used as a guide to authenticity and quality. Recording provenance of an object is crucial in proving that an object was acquired legally and ethically. CatalogIt allows museums and other collecting organizations to accurately track the legal ownership of the objects in their collection by utilizing the Provenance Profile. For a detailed description on documenting Provenance in CatalogIt, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection#:~:text=Using%20the%20%22Provenance%22%20profile%2C,directly%20to%20the%20object%20record.&text=The%20%E2%80%9CProvenance%E2%80%9D%20expansion%20panel%20is,the%20object%20or%20updated%20later. Recording Provenance for Your Collection.] === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 69b3ec6476aeda44435ef2e91005cd70d87890f2 551 550 2025-01-14T19:04:07Z Hunter 9 /* Deaccessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. ==== Deaccessioning ==== '''Deaccessioning''' is the permanent removal of an object or objects from a museum's collection. Deaccessioning objects can be seen as a controversial act, so the processes should not be taken lightly. There are many reasons why a museum may choose to remove an object from their collection including, but not limited to: - Condition: The object has deteriorated past the point of restoration. - Safety: The condition of the object poses a threat to the health and safety of staff and visitors. - Legality: The object was acquired unethically or illegally. - Repatriation: The object was returned via Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA). - Storage and Care: The museum does not have the staff, space, or financial means to properly take care of an object. - Relevance and Mission: The object no longer meets the requirements for collecting outlined in a museum's collection policy. Or, the object no longer fits the mission of the museum. For more information about this process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections#:~:text=Using%20CatalogIt%20to%20Process%20and%20Manage%20Deaccessions&text=From%20within%20the%20Accession%20Profile,clarify%20which%20item%20was%20deaccessioned. Deaccessioning Museum Collections.] === Provenance === Provenance is a record of ownership for an object, used as a guide to authenticity and quality. Recording provenance of an object is crucial in proving that an object was acquired legally and ethically. CatalogIt allows museums and other collecting organizations to accurately track the legal ownership of the objects in their collection by utilizing the Provenance Profile. For a detailed description on documenting Provenance in CatalogIt, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection#:~:text=Using%20the%20%22Provenance%22%20profile%2C,directly%20to%20the%20object%20record.&text=The%20%E2%80%9CProvenance%E2%80%9D%20expansion%20panel%20is,the%20object%20or%20updated%20later. Recording Provenance for Your Collection.] === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] c7ffafcd4e4631640ea2342fa708bb684dbb258f 552 551 2025-01-14T19:05:55Z Hunter 9 /* Deaccessioning */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. ==== Deaccessioning ==== '''Deaccessioning''' is the permanent removal of an object or objects from a museum's collection. Deaccessioning objects can be seen as a controversial act, so the processes should not be taken lightly. There are many reasons why a museum may choose to remove an object from their collection including, but not limited to: - Condition: The object has deteriorated past the point of restoration. - Safety: The condition of the object poses a threat to the health and safety of staff and visitors. - Legality: The object was acquired unethically or illegally. - Repatriation: The object was returned via Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA). - Storage and Care: The museum does not have the staff, space, or financial means to properly take care of an object. - Relevance and Mission: The object no longer meets the requirements for collecting outlined in a museum's collection policy. Or, the object no longer fits the mission of the museum. [https://icom.museum/wp-content/uploads/2019/08/20170503_ICOM_standards_deaccessioning_final_EN-v2.pdf This list was adapted from the Guidelines on Deaccessioning of the International Council of Museums.] For more information about this process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections#:~:text=Using%20CatalogIt%20to%20Process%20and%20Manage%20Deaccessions&text=From%20within%20the%20Accession%20Profile,clarify%20which%20item%20was%20deaccessioned. Deaccessioning Museum Collections.] === Provenance === Provenance is a record of ownership for an object, used as a guide to authenticity and quality. Recording provenance of an object is crucial in proving that an object was acquired legally and ethically. CatalogIt allows museums and other collecting organizations to accurately track the legal ownership of the objects in their collection by utilizing the Provenance Profile. For a detailed description on documenting Provenance in CatalogIt, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection#:~:text=Using%20the%20%22Provenance%22%20profile%2C,directly%20to%20the%20object%20record.&text=The%20%E2%80%9CProvenance%E2%80%9D%20expansion%20panel%20is,the%20object%20or%20updated%20later. Recording Provenance for Your Collection.] === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 8ea2ef7835f85372377f323734523c8490cd75c0 553 552 2025-01-14T21:19:39Z Hunter 9 /* Acquisition Tips */ wikitext text/x-wiki [[CatalogIt_Quick_Tips|CatalogIt Quick Tips]] <html> <!-- personal --> <img width="60" height="60" style="width:60px" src='data:image/svg+xml;base64,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' /> </html> == Collection Tips == === Storing your Collection === The location, conditions, and containers you store your collection in directly affect the preservation of the objects. There are materials and conditions that are best suited to protecting your collection. Proper preservation can be costly, but maintaining your collection for the foreseeable future is priceless. ==== Location ==== The best place to store a collection is in a room away from consistent direct lights (windows, overhead lighting) that have temperature and humidity control. We understand that this type of room is not available to everyone, so find a room that has minimal light and that has stable humidity and temperature. Just make sure to avoid places with drastic swings in the climate like basements, sheds, and garages. ==== Shelving ==== Museum and archival quality storage shelving is usually made of steel that has been powder-coated with epoxy, polyester, or acrylic. Avoid rusty steel shelves and older ones that have a baked enamel coating, as they can release gasses dangerous to your objects. Try and avoid using wood shelving, especially for fragile objects, as they naturally emit organic acids and peroxides that will deteriorate the contents they shelve. ==== Containers ==== When storing large objects, they can be kept safely on a shelf or platform in a room that follows the location requirements above. Some smaller objects and paper materials are best stored in a container. Museum-quality containers are made of non-reactive materials, meaning they do not emit any gasses that can deteriorate the objects they contain. Look for containers that are alkaline-buffered, acid-free, and have a neutral pH. These types of products are usually referred to as “Archival.” These containers can be costly and should be a priority for protecting your collection. Not every organization can afford these so, if non-archival containers must be used, consider wrapping every object with acid-free buffering tissue paper. Avoid storing objects in airtight containers, like plastic bins, can protect objects from leaks, but these tubs can actually capture and hold moisture, damaging the contents. ==== Related Articles ==== * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/conducting-a-collections-inventory-with-catalogit Conducting a Collections Inventory with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/numbering-museum-objects-and-personal-collections Numbering Museum Objects and Personal Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-your-backlog Cataloging your Collections Backlog] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/completing-the-story-using-relationships-in-catalogit Completing the Story: Using Relationships in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/managing-valuation-appraisal-and-insurance-in-catalogit Managing Valuation, Appraisal, and Insurance in CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/cataloging-archives-and-ephemera Cataloging Archives and Ephemera] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/ethnography-profile Ethnography Profile] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/key-considerations-image-collections Key Considerations for Analog and Digital Image Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/no-data-no-rocks No Data No Rocks] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-exhibition-labels-with-catalogit Creating Exhibition Labels with CatalogIt] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/tracking-museum-exhibitions Tracking Museum Exhibitions] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/creating-efficiencies-with-qr-codes Creating Efficiencies with QR Codes in CatalogIt] == Acquisition Tips == === Acquisition vs. Accession === '''Acquisitions''' are objects obtained by a museum. Not all acquisitions need to be cataloged. Any acquisition that the museum intends on adding to their permanent collection and cataloging needs to be accessioned. '''Accessioning''' is the formal process of adding a acquisition to the museum's permanent collection. Only accession objects that fit the mission of your institution and that your museum has the capacity to care for indefinitely. To learn about what what distinguishes the two see our blogpost [https://www.catalogit.app/post/acquisition-v-accession Acquisition v. Accession.] Also see our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Accessioning:~:text=upper%20right%20corner.-,Accessioning,-%5Bedit%5D CatalogIt Basics on Accessioning] for more information of the this process in CatalogIt. ==== Deaccessioning ==== '''Deaccessioning''' is the permanent removal of an object or objects from a museum's collection. Deaccessioning objects can be seen as a controversial act, so the processes should not be taken lightly. There are many reasons why a museum may choose to remove an object from their collection including, but not limited to: - Condition: The object has deteriorated past the point of restoration. - Safety: The condition of the object poses a threat to the health and safety of staff and visitors. - Legality: The object was acquired unethically or illegally. - Repatriation: The object was returned via Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA). - Storage and Care: The museum does not have the staff, space, or financial means to properly take care of an object. - Relevance and Mission: The object no longer meets the requirements for collecting outlined in a museum's collection policy. Or, the object no longer fits the mission of the museum. [https://icom.museum/wp-content/uploads/2019/08/20170503_ICOM_standards_deaccessioning_final_EN-v2.pdf This list was adapted from the Guidelines on Deaccessioning of the International Council of Museums.] For more information about this process, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections#:~:text=Using%20CatalogIt%20to%20Process%20and%20Manage%20Deaccessions&text=From%20within%20the%20Accession%20Profile,clarify%20which%20item%20was%20deaccessioned. Deaccessioning Museum Collections.] === Provenance === Provenance is a record of ownership for an object, used as a guide to authenticity and quality. Recording provenance of an object is crucial in proving that an object was acquired legally and ethically. CatalogIt allows museums and other collecting organizations to accurately track the legal ownership of the objects in their collection by utilizing the Provenance Profile. For a detailed description on documenting Provenance in CatalogIt, see our MasterIt article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection#:~:text=Using%20the%20%22Provenance%22%20profile%2C,directly%20to%20the%20object%20record.&text=The%20%E2%80%9CProvenance%E2%80%9D%20expansion%20panel%20is,the%20object%20or%20updated%20later. Recording Provenance for Your Collection.] === Loans in CatalogIt === ==== Incoming Loans ==== CatalogIt helps make managing incoming loans simple and comprehensive. Using the "Loan In" Profile, you can track lenders, conditions, purposes, shipping, installation, and paperwork related to each loan. Incoming Loans typically fall into three catagories: * Bulleted list item Exhibit Loans: Shorter term loans of objects in connection with exhibitions organized by the museum * Bulleted list item Long Term Loans: Loans of objects for exhibition in the core (permanent collection) galleries. (Note- long term loans should not be taken in for the purpose of storage) * Bulleted list item Temporary Loans: Loans of objects brought in for consideration of acquisition or intended for study by the museum To create a Loan In Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan In either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan In" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more indepth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans]. ==== Outgoing Loans ==== Along with Incoming Loans, CatalogIt helps simply manage and track you Outgoing Loans, using the Outgoing Loans Profile. Outgoing Loans are when an organization or collector allow another organization to borrow one or more of their objects for a set amount of time. When considering a loan request, all museums and organizations should consider or require the following: * Bulleted list item A written loan request including a purpose for the loan, information on the exhibit the object will feature in, the venue it will be displayed in, and a named contact person at the requesting institution. * Bulleted list item A copy of the borrowers "Standard / General Facilities Report" for review. * Bulleted list item Condition reports for all objects. * Bulleted list item Perceived costs. * Bulleted list item Insurance of the loaned object(s). * Bulleted list item Processed Loan Forms. * Bulleted list item Logistics (installation requirements, transportation, scheduled pickup / dropoff and returns, conservation requirements, etc.) To create a Loan Out Profile, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top), Profiles, then select Loan Out either by clicking on the icon, searching, or scrolling. From there, select "Create New Loan Out" and enter all of the pertinent information you have regarding this loan. For a more in depth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans]. === Temporary Custody === Temporary Custody refers to item(s) temporarily taken into custody by the museum. This is a step often used by a museum to take responsibility of an item while they decide if the item should be added to their permanent collection. CatalogIt has a Temporary Custody Profile that helps you easily and efficiently track items coming in on a temporary receipt. To create a new Temporary Custody Profile, go to the Main Menu, Profiles, select Temporary Custody, and click on the "Create a New Temporary Custody Button." CatalogIt will automatically assign the next available unique number, for example the first Temporary Custody of 2025 would be assigned T2025.1. For a more in depth description of this process, see our MasterIt Article [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects#:~:text=Using%20the%20Temporary%20Custody%20Profile,in%20on%20a%20temporary%20receipt.&text=%E2%80%8D-,After%20you%20select%20%E2%80%9CTemporary%20Custody%2C%E2%80%9D%20select%20the%20%E2%80%9CCreate,a%20New%20Temporary%20Custody%E2%80%9D%20button.&text=From%20here%2C%20you%20will%20be,enter%20information%20for%20the%20object. Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Objects.] === Related Articles === * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/accessioning-museum-collections Accessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/deaccessioning-museum-collections Deaccessioning Museum Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-incoming-loans Processing Incoming Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-outgoing-loans Processing Outgoing Loans] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/a-tale-of-two-loans-unexpected-complications A Tale of Two Loans: Unexpected Complications] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/acquisitions Acquisitions] *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/using-catalogit-to-track-temporary-custody-of-objects Using CatalogIt to Track Temporary Custody of Obejcts] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/recording-provenance-for-your-collection Recording Provenance for Your Collection] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/the-importance-of-provenance-managing-unsolicited-gifts-at-small-museums The Importance of Provenance: Managing Unsolicited Gifts at Small Museums] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/processing-year-end-gifts Processing Donations and Year End Gifts] == Sharing and Publishing Tips == CatalogIt allows you to share your collection through the HUB, WordPress Plugin, and API and iFrame integration. See our [https://support.catalogit.app/index.php/CatalogIt_Basics#Web_Publishing CatalogIt Basics on Web Publishing] for information on these features and to download their guides. === Protecting Your Media on the HUB === To protect the media you upload to the HUB, you can follow some steps in addition to CatalogIt’s built in protection to safeguard your media. As a default, your images on the HUB are “Web Quality” meaning they have a lower resolution than the original files uploaded to CatalogIt. This prevents visitors to your HUB from obtaining a copy of your media at original quality. To further protect your media, include watermarks on all photos uploaded. CatalogIt has a built-in feature that will watermark all images uploaded to the HUB. To enable watermarking, go to the Main Menu (three lines in the top left corner), Web Publishing, and select the Media tab. From there you can choose the text and location of the watermark. Make sure to choose text that clearly displays the name of your organization. === Related Articles === *[https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/web-publishing-for-collections-access Web Publishing for Collections Access] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/digital-imaging-guidelines Digital Imaging Guidelines] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/alt-text-made-easy-creating-visual-descriptions-of-your-museums-objects Alt Text Made Easy: Using AI to Create Description] * [https://www.catalogit.app/masterit/sharing-your-collection-through-printing-and-reports Sharing your Collection through Printing and Reports] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/bring-collections-to-web Bring your Collections to the Web] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/connecting-with-your-community-through-collections Connecting with your Community through Collections] * [https://www.catalogit.app/post/print-or-email Print or Email - Sharing your Information with you Community] 4ee4e5edb371715171b5b0bb410e34b06cb25937